Yamaha PSR-292 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Pianos digitales
Tipo
Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

2
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT
connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described
in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart,
rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please
observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time
of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of
the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head-
phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a
high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any
hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before dam-
age occurs.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a func-
tion or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered
by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility.
Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting
service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmen-
tally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production meth-
ods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter
and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applica-
ble) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is
approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a
qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be
rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable
type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a
different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect
installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries
away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by
the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batter-
ies in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its
useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead,
batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact
Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should
record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the
spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your
purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
92-BP
(bottom)
3
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in
this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly
approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use
the product.
2. IMPORTANT:
When connecting this product to accessories and/or
another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied
with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure
to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product
in the USA.
3. NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level
of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equip-
ment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause inter-
ference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance
with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in
all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to
eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the
interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse)
circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the
antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial
type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please
contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you
can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpora-
tion of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave,
Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder
Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sam-
melstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren
Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(class B)
(battery)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar
ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL:
Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge
netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or
slukket pá apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS:
Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta
verkosta.
(standby)
1
4
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C or PA-3B or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument
or overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects
on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll
anything over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord.
Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity
markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid
leakage.
Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together
with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with
manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of
batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery
fluid leakage.
Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.
When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,
remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the
battery fluid.
Keep batteries away from children.
If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid
should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with
water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause
loss of sight or chemical burns.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Battery
Location
(4)-8
1/2
2
5
(4)-8
2/2
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or
rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the
internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Saving and backing up your data
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save
important data to external media such as the Yamaha MDF3 MIDI data filer.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
Regarding the song (or composition) “Just The Way You Are” included in this keyboard
Composition Title : Just The Way You Are
Composer’s Name : Billy Joel
Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD
CAUTION : All Rights Reserved, Unauthorised copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has
license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files,
WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant
laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
Trademarks
Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Saving data
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your instrument.
3
6
Congratulations on your purchase of the Yamaha PSR-292 PortaTone!
You now own a portable keyboard that combines advanced functions, great sound
and exceptional ease-of-use in a highly compact package. Its outstanding features
also make it a remarkably expressive and versatile instrument.
Read this Owner’s Manual carefully while playing your new PSR-292 in order to
take full advantage of its various features.
Main Features
The PSR-292 is a sophisticated yet easy-to-use keyboard with the following features and functions:
Stereo Sampled Piano .......................................................................... page 20
The PSR-292 has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice — created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technol-
ogy and using Yamaha’s sophiscated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system.
Touch Response .................................................................................... page 30
The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maxi-
mum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which
dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength — just a like a real musical
instrument!
Yamaha Education Suite ......................................................... pages 43, 45, 61
The PSR-292 features the new Yamaha Education Suite — a set of learning tools that utilize the latest technol-
ogy to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulfilling than ever before!
One Touch Setting ................................................................................. page 28
The One Touch Setting feature lets you automatically call up an appropriate voice for playing with the selected
style. Each style has memory space for two One Touch Settings, and you can change them to your own desired
voice setting — letting you save your custom panel settings for instant recall.
Powerful Speaker System
The built-in stereo amplifier/speaker system of the PSR-292 — with a special Bass Boost feature — provides
exceptionally powerful, high-quality sound, letting you hear the full dynamic range of the PSR-292’s authentic
voices.
Music Database ..................................................................................... page 48
The PSR-292 has an advanced, easy-to-use Music Database feature that automatically selects the style, voice,
and effect settings for playing in a specific type of music. This can be a big help if you know what genre of
music you want to play, but you don’t know what settings to make. Just select the genre, and the PSR-292 takes
care of the rest!
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data
can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is
affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Natu-
rally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs
may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.
7
Panel Controls and Terminals ........................ 8
Setting Up....................................................... 10
• Power Requirements ........................................10
• Turning On the Power.......................................11
• Accessory Jacks ...............................................11
Quick Guide 12
Step 1 Voices ........................................................... 12
Step 2 Songs............................................................ 14
Step 3 Music Database............................................. 16
Panel Display Indications .............................18
Portable Grand............................................... 20
• Playing the Portable Grand...............................20
• Using the Metronome .......................................20
DJ .................................................................... 22
• Playing the DJ...................................................22
Playing Voices ...............................................23
• Playing a Voice .................................................23
• #000 OTS .........................................................26
• Dual Voice ........................................................26
• Split Voice.........................................................27
• Setting the Split Point .......................................27
• One Touch Setting............................................28
• Transpose and Tuning......................................29
• Touch and Touch Sensitivity.............................30
Effects............................................................. 31
• Harmony ...........................................................31
• Reverb ..............................................................31
• Chorus ..............................................................32
• DSP ..................................................................32
Selecting and Playing Styles ........................ 35
• Selecting a Style ...............................................35
• Playing the Styles .............................................36
• Sync Stop .........................................................40
• Changing the Tempo ........................................41
• Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins).
42
• Adjusting the Style Volume...............................42
• Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering 43
• Dictionary..........................................................45
Using the Music Database ............................ 48
• Data stored by the Music Database..................50
Selecting and Playing Songs ....................... 51
• Selecting a Song...............................................51
• Playing the Songs.............................................53
• A-B Repeat .......................................................54
• Melody Voice Change.......................................55
• Adjusting the Song Volume ..............................55
Song Recording............................................. 56
• Recording a User Song ....................................56
• Song Clear........................................................59
• Track Clear .......................................................60
Song Lesson.................................................. 61
• Using the Lesson Feature.................................61
• Select the Lesson Track ...................................63
• Lesson 1 — Timing...........................................63
• Lesson 2 — Waiting..........................................64
• Lesson 3 — Minus One ....................................64
• Lesson 4 — Both Hands...................................65
• Grade................................................................65
MIDI Functions............................................... 66
• What Is MIDI? ...................................................66
• Connecting to a Personal Computer.................68
• Local Control.....................................................69
• Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer.......69
• External Clock...................................................69
• Bulk Data Send.................................................69
• Keyboard Out....................................................70
• Style Out ...........................................................70
• Song Out...........................................................70
• Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory 71
• PC Mode...........................................................73
Function ......................................................... 74
• Using the Function parameters.........................74
Troubleshooting ............................................ 77
Data Backup & Initialization ......................... 78
Voice List ....................................................... 79
Style List ........................................................ 86
Music Database List...................................... 87
Drum Kit List.................................................. 88
MIDI Implementation Chart........................... 90
Effect map ...................................................... 92
Specifications ................................................ 93
Index ............................................................... 94
Contents
8
Panel Controls and Terminals
q
Power switch ([STANDBY/ON])
w
[MASTER VOLUME] dial
This determines the overall volume of the PSR-292.
e
[TOUCH] button
This turns the Touch function on and off. (See page
30.)
r
[HARMONY] button
This turns the Harmony effect on and off. (See page
31.)
t
[DUAL] button
This turns the Dual voice on or off. (See page 26.)
y
[SPLIT] button
This turns the Split voice on and off. (See page 27.)
u
[DICTIONARY] button
This calls up the Dictionary function (page 45).
i
[DJ] button
This instantly calls up a special DJ voice and style.
o
[PC] Button
This exceptionally convenient control lets you store
and instantly call up the specified MIDI settings for
optimum use with a connected computer or other
MIDI device. (See page 73.)
!0
LESSON [L] (Left) and [R] (Right) buttons
These call up the Lesson exercises for the correspond-
ing hand (left or right) for the selected song. (See
page 62.)
!1
[METRONOME] button
This turns the metronome on and off. (See page 20.)
!2
[PORTABLE GRAND] button
This instantly calls up the Grand Piano voice. (See
page 12.)
!3
[DEMO] button
This is used to play the Demo song. (See page 14.)
!4
[FUNCTION] Button
This calls up the Function mode and stores the speci-
fied panel setting to the flash memory (see pages 74,
78).
!5
[SONG] button
This is for enabling song selection. (See page 51.)
!6
[STYLE] button
This is for enabling style selection. (See page 35.)
!7
[VOICE] button
This is for enabling voice selection. (See page 23.)
Holding down this button calls up the Melody Voice
Change function. (See page 55.)
!8
[M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button
This calls up the optimum panel settings for selected
music genre. (See page 48.)
!9
Dial, CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons,
SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons
This dial is used to select the number of the desired
song, voice, style or M.D.B.. (See page 24.) This
also used to set the Tempo and Function value.
The CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to select
f
r
>
<
f
r
Front Panel
001092
GrandPno
001
q
w
e
r
t
u i
!0
o
!1 !2
y
@4 @6@3
!8
!7
!6
!5
!4
!3
@2
@1
@0
!9
@5 @7
@8 @9
Panel Controls and Terminals
9
the category of songs, voices, styles, M.D.B. or Func-
tions. Pressing the buttons steps through the various
categories.
The SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to decrease
or increase the number of the desired song, voice,
style, M.D.B., or specific Function, as well as to
adjust certain settings.
@0
Numeric keypad, [+/YES] and [-/NO] but-
tons
These are used for selecting songs, voices, and styles.
(See pages 24.) They are also used for adjusting cer-
tain settings and answering certain display prompts.
@1
[ACMP] / [A-B REPEAT] button
When the Style mode is selected, this turns the auto
accompaniment on and off. (See page 36.) In the
Song mode, this calls up the A-B Repeat function.
(See page 54.)
@2
[SYNC STOP] button
This turns the Sync Stop function on and off. (See
page 40.)
@3
[SYNC START] / [PAUSE] button
This turns the Sync Start function on and off. (See
page 37.) In the Song mode, it is used to temporarily
pause song playback. (See page 53.)
@4
[INTRO ENDING] / [REW
rr
rr
] button
When the Style mode is selected, this is used to con-
trol the Intro and Ending functions. (See page 36.)
When the Song mode is selected, this is used as a
“rewind” control, or move the song playback point
back toward the beginning.
@5
[MAIN/AUTO FILL] / [FF
ff
ff
] button
When the Style mode is selected, these are used to
change auto accompaniment sections and control the
Auto Fill function. (See page 42.) When the Song
mode is selected, this is used as a “fast forward” con-
trol, or move the song playback point toward the end.
@6
[START/STOP] button
When the Style mode is selected, this alternately starts
and stops the style. (See page 36.) In the Song mode,
this alternately starts and stops song playback. (See
page 54.)
@7
[TEMPO/TAP] button
This button is used to call up the Tempo setting, let-
ting you set the Tempo with the dial, numeric keypad
or [+]/[-] buttons. (See page 20.) It also allows you to
tap out the tempo and automatically start a selected
song or style at that tapped speed. (See page 37.)
@8
ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons
These buttons ([MEMORY], [1], [2]) are used to
select the One Touch Setting registrations. (See page
28.)
@9
SONG MEMORY buttons
These buttons ([REC], [1] - [5], [A]) are used for song
recording, letting you record up to six different tracks
of a song (including a special Chord track). (See page
57.)
>
<
Rear Panel
#3
#0
#1 #2
#0 MIDI IN, OUT terminals
These are for connection to other MIDI instruments
and devices. (See page 67.)
#1 SUSTAIN jack
This is for connection to an optional FC4 or FC5
Footswitch for control over sustain, just like the
damper pedal on a piano. (See page 11.)
#2 PHONES/OUTPUT jack
This is for connection to a set of stereo headphones or
to an external amplifier/speaker system. (See page
11.)
#3 DC IN 12V jack
This is for connection to a PA-3C or PA-3B AC power
adaptor. (See page 10.)
10
Setting Up
This section contains information about setting up your PSR-292 for playing. Make sure to
read this section carefully before using the instrument.
Although the PSR-292 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries,
Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is
more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources.
Using an AC Power Adaptor • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
q Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the PSR-292 is set to
STANDBY.
w Connect the AC adaptor (PA-3C, PA-3B, or other adaptor specifically recom-
mended by Yamaha) to the power supply jack.
e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Using Batteries • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
For battery operation the PSR-292 requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or
equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When the batteries
need to be replaced, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and
other problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the
batteries, as described below
q Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel.
w Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on
the inside of the compartment.
e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place.
Power Requirements
Never interrupt the power sup-
ply (e.g. remove the batteries
or unplug the AC adaptor) dur-
ing any PSR-292 record opera-
tion! Doing so can result in a
loss of data.
Never attempt to turn the
power off when a “WRITING!”
message is shown in the dis-
play. Doing so can damage the
internal flash memory and
result in loss of data.
Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-3C or
PA-3B AC Power Adaptor (or
other adaptor specifically rec-
ommended by Yamaha) to
power your instrument from
the AC mains. The use of other
adaptors may result in irrepa-
rable damage to both the adap
-
tor and the PSR-292.
Unplug the AC Power Adaptor
when not using the PSR-292,
or during electrical storms.
we
When the batteries run down,
replace them with a complete
set of six new batteries.
NEVER mix old and new bat-
teries.
Do not use different kinds of
batteries (e.g. alkaline and
manganese) at the same time.
If the instrument is not to be in
use for a long time, remove the
batteries from it, in order to
prevent possible fluid leakage
from the battery.
Setting Up
11
With the AC power adaptor connected or
with batteries installed, simply press the
power switch until it locks in the ON posi-
tion. When the instrument is not in use, be
sure to turn the power off. (Press the switch
again so that it pops up.)
Using Headphones
For private practicing and playing without dis-
turbing others, connect a set of stereo headphones
to the rear panel PHONES/OUTPUT jack.
Sound from the built-in speaker system is auto-
matically cut off when you insert a headphone
plug into this jack.
Connecting a Keyboard Amplier or Stereo System
Though the PSR-292 is equipped with a built-in
speaker system, you can also play it through an
external amplifier/speaker system. First, make
sure the PSR-292 and any external devices are
turned off, then connect one end of a stereo audio
cable to the LINE IN or AUX IN jack(s) of the
other device and the other end to the rear panel
PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the PSR-292.
Using a Footswitch
This feature lets you use an optional footswitch
(Yamaha FC4 or FC5) to sustain the sound of the
voices. The footswitch functions the same way
as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano — press
and hold down the footswitch as you play the
keyboard to sustain the sound.
Using the MIDI Terminals
The PSR-292 also features MIDI terminals,
allowing you to interface the PSR-292 with other
MIDI instruments and devices. (For more infor-
mation, see page 67.)
Turning On the Power
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,
electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the mini-
mum level. When you are not using the PSR-292 for a
long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor
from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries
from the instrument.
Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!”
message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage
the internal flash memory and result in loss of data.
Accessory Jacks
Stereo System
To prevent damage to the
speakers, set the volume of the
external devices at the mini-
mum setting before connect-
ing them. Failure to observe
these cautions may result in
electric shock or equipment
damage. Also, be sure to set
the volumes of all devices at
their minimum levels and grad
-
ually raise the volume controls
while playing the instrument to
set the desired listening level.
Make sure that the footswitch
plug is properly connected to the
SUSTAIN jack before turning on
the power.
Do not press the footswitch while
turning the power on. Doing this
changes the recognized polarity
of the footswitch, resulting in
reversed footswitch operation.
MIDI
instrument
12
001092
GrandPno
001
w
q
zz qr
z
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
x
Play the keyboard.
Want to find out more? See page 20.
001
GrandPno
Simply by pressing the [PORTABLE GRAND] button, you can automatically select the Grand Piano voice.
z
Press the [METRONOME] button.
Want to find out more? See page 20.
Playing along with the Metronome
Step 1 Voices
Quick
Guide
No. Voice Name
PIANO
001 Grand Piano
002 Bright Piano
003 Honky-tonk Piano
004 MIDI Grand Piano
005 CP 80
006 Harpsichord
E.PIANO
007 Galaxy EP
008 Funky Electric Piano
009
DX Modern Elec. Piano
010 Hyper Tines
011 Venus Electric Piano
012 Clavi
ORGAN
013 Jazz Organ 1
014 Jazz Organ 2
015 Click Organ
016 Bright Organ
017 Rock Organ
018 Purple Organ
019 16'+2' Organ
020 16'+4' Organ
021 Theater Organ
022 Church Organ
023 Chapel Organ
024 Reed Organ
No. Voice Name
ACCORDION
025
Traditional Accordion
026 Musette Accordion
027 Bandoneon
028 Harmonica
GUITAR
029 Classical Guitar
030 Folk Guitar
031 12Strings Guitar
032 Jazz Guitar
033 Octave Guitar
034 Clean Guitar
035 60’s Clean Guitar
036 Muted Guitar
037 Overdriven Guitar
No. Voice Name
038 Distortion Guitar
BASS
039 Acoustic Bass
040 Finger Bass
041 Pick Bass
042 Fretless Bass
043 Slap Bass
044 Synth Bass
045 Hi-Q Bass
046 Dance Bass
STRINGS
047 String Ensemble
048 Chamber Strings
049 Synth Strings
050 Slow Strings
No. Voice Name
051 Tremolo Strings
052 Pizzicato Strings
053 Orchestra Hit
054 Violin
055 Cello
056 Contrabass
057 Banjo
058 Harp
CHOIR
059 Choir
060 Vocal Ensemble
061 Vox Humana
062 Air Choir
No. Voice Name
Panel Voice List
Playing the Piano
* This list includes only a portion of the total available voices.
Step 1 Voices
13
q
Press the [VOICE] button.
001
GrandPno
The PSR-292 has a huge total of 605 dynamic and realistic instrument voices. Let’s try a few of them out now...
w
Select a voice.
e
Play the keyboard.
002
BritePno
or
You can also select the appropriate category
by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.
f
r
Want to find out more? See page 23.
q
Press the [DJ] button.
w
Play the DJ style.
The DJ starts as soon as you play keys in the accompa-
niment area of the keyboard.
000
DJ Set 1
Accompaniment
area
The exciting new DJ feature gives you a full variety of dance and DJ sounds — letting you create your own real-time mixes
and groove along with various contemporary rhythms.
e
Play the DJ voices.
r
Stop the DJ style.
Want to find out more? See page 22.
No. Voice Name
SAXOPHONE
063 Soprano Sax
064 Alto Sax
065 Tenor Sax
066 Breathy Tenor
067 Baritone Sax
068 Oboe
069 English Horn
070 Bassoon
071 Clarinet
TRUMPET
072 Trumpet
073 Muted Trumpet
074 Trombone
075 Trombone Section
076 French Horn
077 Tuba
BRASS
078 Brass Section
079 Big Band Brass
080 Mellow Horns
081 Synth Brass
082 Jump Brass
083 Techno Brass
FLUTE
084 Flute
085 Piccolo
086 Pan Flute
No. Voice Name
087 Recorder
088 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
089 Square Lead
090 Sawtooth Lead
091 Voice Lead
092 Star Dust
093 Brightness
094 Analogon
095 Fargo
SYNTH PAD
096 Fantasia
097 Bell Pad
098 Xenon Pad
No. Voice Name
099 Equinox
100 Dark Moon
PERCUSSION
101 Vibraphone
102 Marimba
103 Xylophone
104 Steel Drums
105 Celesta
106 Tubular Bells
107 Timpani
108 Music Box
DRUM KITS
109 Standard Kit 1
110 Standard Kit 2
No. Voice Name
111 Room Kit
112 Rock Kit
113 Electronic Kit
114 Analog Kit
115 Dance Kit
116 Jazz Kit
117 Brush Kit
118 Symphony Kit
119 SFX Kit 1
120 SFX Kit 2
No. Voice Name
Selecting and Playing Other Voices
Playing with the DJ Feature
14
Quick
Guide
Step 2 Songs
001092
GrandPno
001
zx
z
xq
w
xcr
The PSR-292 is packed with a total of 100 songs, including one Demo song — which has been specially created to show-
case the rich and dynamic sounds of the instrument. There are also 99 additional songs, designed to be used with the edu-
cational Lesson feature.
You can also play songs loaded to the PSR via MIDI. The songs can be stored to song numbers 101-199. (See page 71.)
Let’s play the Demo song now, Repeating with #001.
z
Start the Demo song.
x
Stop the Demo song.
Playing the Demo song
001
Just You
You can also play back songs of other categories. Simply
select the appropriate number of the desired song during
playback.
or
The PSR-292 also has a Demo and DJ Cancel function that allows
you to disable Demo song and DJ function.
Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the Function mode (page
76).
Naturally, you can also individually select and play back
the PSR-292’s songs (001 - 205).
z
Press the [SONG] button.
x
Select a song.
c
Start (and stop) the song.
Want to find out more? See page 51.
Playing a single song
001
Just You
002
B Bailey
or
You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ]
buttons.
f
r
Playing the Songs
Step 2 Songs
15
e
Start recording by playing a melody on
the keyboard.
The PSR-292 starts recording as soon as you
play the first note on the keyboard.
r
To stop recording, press the [START/
STOP] button.
Want to find out more? See page 56.
No. Song Name
Demo
001 Just The Way You Are
Favorites
002 Bill Bailey (Won’t You Please
Come Home)
003 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling
004 Down By The Riverside
005 America The Beautiful
006 When The Saints Go
Marchin’ In
Orchestra
007 Frühlingsstimmen
008 Danse Des Mirlitons From
“The Nutcracker”
009 “Orphée Aux Enfers” Ouver-
ture
010 Slavonic Dances No.10
011 La Primavera (From Le Quat-
tro Stagioni)
012 Méditation De Thais
013 Guillaume Tell
014 Camptown Races
015 Frühlingslied
016 Ungarische Tänze Nr.5
Pianist
017 Dolly’s Dreaming And Awak-
ening
018 La Candeur
019 Arabesque
020 Pastorale
021 Petite Réunion
022 Innocence
023 Progrès
024 Tarentelle
025 La Chevaleresque
026 Etude Op.10-3 “Chanson De
L’adieu”
027 Marcia Alla Turca
028 Turkish March
029 Valse Op.64-1 “Peiti Chien”
030 Menuett
031 Nocturne Op.9-2
032 Moments Musicaux Op.94-3
033 The Entertainer
034 Prelude (Wohltemperierte
Klavier 1-1)
035 La Viollette
036 Für Elise
Practice
037 Little Brown Jug
038 Loch Lomond
039 Oh! Susanna
040 Greensleeves
041 Aura Lee
042 Londonderry Air
043 Ring De Banjo
044 Wenn Ich Ein Vöglein Wär ?
045 Die Lorelei
046 Funiculi-Funicula
047 Turkey In The Straw
048 Old Folks At Home
049 Silent Night
050 Jingle Bells
No. Song Name
051 Muss I Denn
052 Liebesträume Nr.3
053 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring
054 Symphonie Nr.9
055 Song Of The Pearl Fisher
056 Gavotte
057 String Quartet No.17 2nd
Mov. “Serenade”
058 Menuett
059 Canon
060 The Danube Waves
061 From “The Magic Flute”
062 Piano Sonate Op.27-2
“Mondschein”
063 “The Surprise” Symphony
064 To A Wild Rose
065 Air de Toréador “Carmen”
066 O Mio Babbino Caro (From
“Gianni Schicchi”)
Duet
067 Row Row Row Your Boat
068 On Top Of Old Smoky
069 We Wish You A Merry Christ-
mas
070 Scarborough Fair
071 Im Mai
072 O Christmas Tree
073 Mary Had A Little Lamb
074 Ten Little Indians
075 Pop Goes The Weasel
076 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star
No. Song Name
077 Close Your Hands, Open
Your Hands
078 The Cuckoo
079 O Du Lieber Augustin
080 London Bridge
Chord Lesson
081 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star
082 Close Your Hands, Open
Your Hands
083 The Cuckoo
084 O Du Lieber Augustin
085 London Bridge
086 American Patrol
087 Beautiful Dreamer
088 Battle Hymn Of The Republic
089 Home Sweet Home
090 Valse Des Fleurs (From “The
Nutcracker”)
091 Aloha Oe
092 I’ve Been Working On The
Railroad
093 My Darling Clementine
094 Auld Lang Syne
095 Grandfather’s Clock
096 Amazing Grace
097 My Bonnie
098 Yankee Doodle
099 Joy To The World
100 Ave Maria
No. Song Name
Song List
q
Select the desired User song (201 - 205) for recording.
w
Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press
the desired track number button ([1] - [5]).
202
User 2
or
You can also select the appropriate category
by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.
f
r
202
User 2
Recording Your Own Song
Much like a multi-track tape recorder, the PSR-292 lets you play and record the individual parts of your own song in real
time.
16
Quick
Guide
001092
GrandPno
001
x
zb
v z
z
Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button.
001
AlvFever
Here’s a convenient feature that lets you instantly reconfigure the
PSR-292 for playing in different music styles. If you want to per-
form in a certain genre but don’t know what settings to make,
simply select the genre from the Music Database — and the PSR-
292 makes all the right settings for you!
Accompaniment
area
Left hand
Auto accompaniment
(for example,
bass + guitar + drums)
Right hand
Melody
+
For more infomation on playing proper chords for the auto accompa-
niment, see “Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering” on page
43 and “Looking up Chords in the Dictionary” on the next page.
x
Select a Music Database.
Refer to the Music Database List on page 87.
002
Croco Rk
or
• You can also select the appropriate category by using the
[ ]/[ ] buttons.
f
r
Step 3 Music Database
Music Database
Step 3 Music Database
17
The convenient Dictionary function teaches you how to play chords by showing you the individual notes. In the example
below, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 chord...
z
Press the [DICTIONARY] button.
x
Specify the root note of the chord (in this case,
G).
Learning how to play a specific chord
Keys for entering
the chord type
(C3 – B4)
Keys for entering
the chord root
(C5 – B5)
Keys for entering
the chord
(C1 – B2)
GM7
Root note Chord type
Example:
Dict.
c
Specify the chord type of the chord (in this
case, M7).
v
Play the notes of the chord as indicated in the
keyboard diagram in the display. The chord
name ashes when the chord is played prop-
erly.
b
To leave the Dictionary function, press the
[DICTIONARY] button again
Want to find out more? See page 45.
Chord area
c
Play a chord with your left hand.
The style starts as soon as you play
the keyboard, letting you play the
melody along with accompani-
ment. For more on chords, see
“Looking up Chords in the Dictio-
nary” above.
v
Stop the style.
Want to find out more? See page 48.
Accompaniment
area
Looking up Chords in the Dictionary
18
Panel Display Indications
The PSR-292 features a large multi-function display that shows all important settings for the
instrument. The section below briefly explains the various icons and indications in the display.
001
GrandPno
092 001
q Notation
e Beat marks
!2 Chord
r Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B.
name and number
!3 Song track
indicators
t Touch indicator
y Harmony indicator
u Dual indicator
i Split indicator
o Accompaniment On
indicator
!0 Sync Stop indicator
!1 Measure and Tempo
w Keyboard
!4 Octave indicator
q
Notation /
w
Keyboard
These two portions of the display conveniently indi-
cate notes. When a song is being played back, they
show the melody or chord notes in succession. When
you play the keyboard yourself, the display shows the
notes you play.
e
Beat marks
These marks (one large, three small) flash in sequence
and in time with the song or style. The large arrow
indicates the first beat of the measure.
r
Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B. name and number
This portion of the display indicates the name and
number of the currently selected song, voice, style or
M.D.B. It also displays the category name when
using the category button, or the name and current set-
ting/value of other functions, as well as other impor-
tant operation messages.
t
Touch indicator
This appears when the Touch function is turned on.
(See page 30.)
y
Harmony indicator
This appears when the Harmony effect is turned on.
(See page 31.)
u
Dual indicator
This appears when the Dual function is turned on.
(See page 26.)
i
Split indicator
This appears when the Split function is turned on.
(See page 27.)
o
Accompaniment On indicator
This appears when the auto accompaniment is turned
on. (See page 36.)
For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the nota-
tion section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the
display.
Panel Display Indications
19
!0
Sync Stop indicator
This appears when the Sync Stop function is turned
on. (See page 40.)
!1
Measure and Tempo
These show the current measure during playback of a
song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for
the song or style.
!2
Chord
When a song (with chords) is being played back, this
indicates the current chord root and type. It also indi-
cates chords played in the ACMP area of the keyboard
when the Style mode and auto accompaniment are on.
!3
Song track indicators
In song recording and playback, these indicate the sta-
tus of the tracks. (See page 57.)
!4
Octave indicator
When note data exceeds the range limit of note dis-
play, the “8va” indication appears in the display.
Music Stand
Insert the bottom edge of the included music stand into
the slot located at the top rear of the PSR-292 control
panel.
20
Portable Grand
This convenient function lets you instantly call up the Grand Piano voice.
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
Doing this automatically selects the special “Stereo Sampled Piano” Grand Piano
voice.
1 Call up the Tempo setting.
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button.
2 Change the value.
Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the
[+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value.
Playing the Portable Grand
001
GrandPno
Using the Metronome
Current Tempo value
148
TEMPO
148
Restoring the Default Tempo
Value
Each song and style has been
given a default or standard Tempo
setting. If you’ve changed the
Tempo, you can instantly restore
the default setting by pressing both
[+]/[-] buttons simultaneously
(when Tempo is selected).
You can also restore the default
Tempo easily by simultaneously
holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button
and moving the dial.
or
Portable Grand
21
3 Turn on the Metronome.
Press the [METRONOME] button.
To turn the Metronome off, press the [METRONOME] button again.
1148
Indicates the beat number
in the measure.
Setting the Metronome Time Signature
The time signature of the Metronome can be set to var-
ious quarter-note based meters.
The Time Signature can be set in the Function mode
(page 76).
• The time signature changes automatically when a style or song is
selected.
Numeric
keypad
Time signature
01 1/4 — Plays only “1” beats (all high clicks)
02 2/4
03 3/4
04 4/4
: :
15 15/4
0 Plays no “1” beats (all low clicks)
04
Time Sig
Indicates current beat number.
Adjusting the Metronome Volume
You can adjust the volume of the Metronome sound in the Function mode (page 76). The volume range is 000 -
127.
22
DJ
This exciting feature lets you instantly call up a dynamic DJ voice and style for playing contem-
porary dance music.
1 Press the [DJ] button.
Doing this automatically resets the entire instrument for playing the spe-
cially programmed DJ voice.
2 Play the DJ style.
Play keys in the accompaniment area of the keyboard.
3 Play the DJ voices.
Play the upper area of the keyboard.
4 Stop the DJ style.
Playing the DJ
000
DJ Set 1
The PSR-292 has a Demo song
and DJ Cancel function that
allows you to disable Demo song
and DJ function.
Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the
Function mode (page 76).
Accompaniment
area
When the DJ style is selected,
the accompaniment is triggered
by only the root of the chord, let-
ting you play with one finger.
Reverse
FXTBrs
Ohh1
Scratch 1
Scratch 3
Joo
Huihu
Huea
GetUp
Go
Scratch 2
Scratch 4
Scratch 5
Accompaniment area
(C1 – F#2)
Ohh2 FX02
C3
For example, when 601 DJ Set 1 is selected:
23
Playing Voices
The PSR-292 features a total of 605 authentic voices all of which have been created with
Yamahas sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. These
include 480 XG voices and drum kits.
The PSR-292 also has a Dual Voice or Split Voice function that lets you combine two different
voices in a layer, or play from separate areas of the keyboard, play the two together across the
keyboard.
1 Press the [VOICE] button.
2 Select the desired voice number.
The categories of each voice and their numbers are shown on the panel. A
complete voice list of the available voices is given on page 79.
Use the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons, dial or the SELECT [ ]/
[ ] buttons.
Select the voice CATEGORY
Using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] button jumps through the voice num-
bers according to their category divisions.
Playing a Voice
001
GrandPno
Voice name and number
Selecting the #000 OTS voice
calls up a convenient feature —
automatically selecting an appro-
priate voice to best match the
current style or song.
f
r
>
<
f
r
GUITAR
Category name
Playing Voices
24
Select the voice number
Select a voice by using the dial or the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons.
Use the numeric keypad.
There are two ways to select voices: 1) directly entering the voice number
with the numeric keypad, or 2) using the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down
through the voice numbers.
Using the numeric keypad
Enter the digits of the voice number as listed on page 79. For example, to
select voice #109, press “1” on the numeric keypad, then “0”, “9.” For
voice numbers beginning with zeroes (such as #042 or #006), the initial
zeroes may be omitted. In this case, there is a short pause before the indi-
cation appears.
Using the [+]/[-] buttons
Press the [+] button to select the next voice number, and press the [-] but-
ton to select the previous voice. Holding down either button continuously
scrolls up or down through the numbers.
>
<
032
Jazz Gtr
109
Std.Kit1
Each voice is automatically
called up with the most suitable
octave range setting. Thus, play-
ing middle C with one voice may
sound higher or lower than
another voice at the same key.
Playing Voices
25
3 Play the selected voice.
Since either the Style, Song or M.D.B. mode is active in the background, you
can also play styles, songs or M.D.B., respectively, in the Voice mode by
simply pressing the [START/STOP] button. The last selected style, song or
M.D.B. will be played.
The following par
ameteres can be set in the Function mode (page 75).
CATEGORY SELECT
Main Voice Volume
Octave
Pan
Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
DSP Send Level
C3
Ride Cymbal 1
Tambourine
Cowbell
Vibraslap
Bongo L
Hi-Hat Open
Crash Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal
Conga H Open
Timbale L
Agogo L
Brush Slap
Castanet
Sticks
Open Rim Shot
Side Stick
Brush Tap
Hand Clap
Hi-Hat Closed
Maracas
Guiro Short
Claves
Cuica Mute
Triangle Mute
Shaker
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Splash Cymbal
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Conga H Mute
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Low Tom
Floor Tom H
Conga L
Snare H Soft
Bass Drum Soft
Bass Drum Hard
Bass Drum
Snare M
Snare H Hard
Floor Tom L
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Seq Click H
Timbale H
Agogo H
Cabasa
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Long
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Open
Triangle Open
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Drum Kit Voice List (voices 109-120)
When one of the 12 Drum Kit voices is selected, you
can play different drum and percussion instrument
sounds from the keyboard.
For more details, see page 88.
No. Name LCD
109 Standard Kit 1 Std.Kit1
110 Standard Kit 2 Std.Kit2
111 Room Kit Room Kit
112 Rock Kit Rock Kit
113 Electronic Kit Elct.Kit
114 Analog Kit AnlogKit
115 Dance Kit DanceKit
116 Jazz Kit Jazz Kit
117 Brush Kit BrushKit
118 Symphony Kit SymphKit
119 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit1
120 SFX Kit 2 SFX Kit2
For example, when 109 Standard Kit 1 is selected:
Playing Voices
26
This special “voice” is actually a convenient feature which automatically selects a
suitable voice for you when you select a style. The voice is selected to best match
the style or song you’ve called up.
Select voice #000 (OTS).
The Dual Voice function lets you combine two different voices in a layer — one
the Main voice, which is selected normally, and the other the Dual voice, which is
selected in the Function mode (pa
ge 75). You can also set various parameters
independently for these voices, such as giving them separate volume, octave, Pan,
Reverb, Chorus, and DSP settings. This lets you create an optimum mix for the
voices, and enhance the way they blend together.
The following par
ameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75).
To turn the Dual Voice on or off, press the [DUAL] button.
CATEGORY SELECT
Dual Voice Voice
Volume
Octave
Pan
Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
DSP Send Level
#000 OTS
#000 OTS is selected.
or
000
GrandPno
Dual Voice
001
GrandPno
Indicates Dual
Voice is on.
Playing Voices
27
The Split Voice function lets you assign two different Voices to opposite areas of
the keyboard, and play one Voice with your left hand while your right plays
another.
For example, you could play bass with the left hand and play piano with the right.
The right-hand (or upper) Voice is selected in the Main Voice mode (page 23), and
the left-hand (or lower) Voice is selected in the Function mode (pa
ge 75), along
with the other Split Voice parameters shown below.
The following par
ameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75).
To turn the Split Voice on or off, press the [SPLIT] button.
The Split Point determines the highest key for the split voice and sets the split
point.
Split P
oint can be set in the Function mode (page 75).
CATEGORY SELECT
Split Voice Voice
Volume
Octave
Pan
Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
DSP Send Level
Split Voice
001
GrandPno
Indicates Split
Voice is on.
Setting the Split Point
This setting also affects the split
point for the accompaniment
area.
Split Point
Split Voice Main Voice
Playing Voices
28
This convenient feature automatically selects the voice to best match the selected
style — simply by pressing one of the two One Touch Setting buttons. Two types
of One Touch Settings are available.
For each style, you can create and store your own custom One Touch Settings.
One Touch Setting Parameters
* Accompaniment is automatically set to on.
Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped).
Calling up a One Touch Setting. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1
Select the style.
2
Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or [2].
Main Voice Voice Number Effect DSP Type
Volume Harmony On/Off
Octave Harmony Type
Pan Harmony Volume
Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
DSP Send Level
Dual Voice ON/Off
Voice Number
Volume
Octave
Pan
Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
DSP Send Level
One Touch Setting
One Touch Setting does not func
-
tion in the Song mode.
or
OTS 2
Playing Voices
29
Creating and Storing a One Touch Setting.
You can also create and store your own custom One Touch Settings for each of the
styles.
1 Select the desired style.
2 Make the desired settings.
Change the voice and make any other settings you want to use with the
selected style and the One Touch Setting buttons.
3 Press and hold the [MEMORY] button then press the
appropriate button ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or
[2].
You can also adjust the tuning and change the transposition (key) of the entire
PSR-292 sound with the Transpose and Tuning functions.
Transpose
Transpose determines the key of both the main voice and the bass/chord accompa-
niment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to easily match
the pitch of the PSR-292 to other instruments or singers, or play in a different key
without changing your fingering. The Transpose settings can be adjusted over a
range of ± 12 semitones (± 1 octave).
T
ranspose can be set in the Function mode (page 75).
Tuning • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Tuning determines the fine pitch setting of both the main voice and the bass/chord
accompaniment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to
accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. The Tuning settings
can be adjusted over a range of ± 100 (approx. ± 1 semitone).
T
uning can be set in the Function mode (page 75).
WRITING!
Restoring the Default One
Touch Setting data
Each One Touch Setting can be
restored to its default. To do this,
simply press and hold the appropri
-
ate One Touch Setting button, [1] or
[2]. To restore both buttons to their
defaults, simultaneously press and
hold both the [1] and [2] buttons.
Transpose and Tuning
The Transpose function has no
effect on the Drum Kits voices
(#109 - #120) and DJ voices
(#601 - #605).
The Tuning settings have no
effect on the Drum Kit voices
(#109 - #120).
Playing Voices
30
The Touch function gives you dynamic, expressive control over the voices, letting
you determine how loud or soft the sound is by your playing strength.
Turn the Touch function on or off as desired by pressing
the [TOUCH] button.
Touch Sensitivity lets you set how the PSR-292 responds to your playing strength,
allowing you to customize the keyboard to suit your own playing style.
The default Touch Sensitivity is 2 (Medium).
Sensitivity can be set in the Function mode (pa
ge 75).
Settings:
When Touch is turned off, a constant volume (corresponding to a velocity value of
80) is produced.
1 (Soft) This results in limited touch response, and produces a relatively narrow
dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you play the keys.
2 (Medium) This lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud).
3 (Hard) This is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly more
detailed control in the soft volume range.
Touch and Touch Sensitivity
To save the Touch on/off status
and the Function parameters to
internal memory (flash memory),
press and hold the [FUNCTION]
button. (See page 78.)
001
GrandPno
Indicates Touch
function is on.
31
Effects
The PSR-292 is equipped with a wide variety of effects that can be used to enhance the sound
of the voices. The PSR-292 has four separate effect systems Harmony, Reverb, Chorus and
DSP and each has many different effect types to choose from.
The Harmony section features a variety of performance effects that enhance the
melodies you play when using the accompaniment styles of the PSR-292. A total
of twenty-six Harmony types are available. (See page 33.)
Tremolo, Trill and Echo effects can be used even if accompaniment is off.
There are five different Harmony Types that automatically create harmony parts
(for notes played in the upper section of the keyboard) to match the accompani-
ment chords.
Turn on/off the Harmony effect.
Press the [HARMONY] button.
Harmony type and Harmony
Volume (when Harmony Type 1 - 5 is selected) can
be set in the Function mode (page 76).
The Reverb effect reproduces the natural ambient “wash” of sound that occurs
when a instrument is played in a room or concert hall. A total of eight different
Reverb types simulating various different performance environments are avail-
able. (See page 33.)
The following par
ameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76).
CATEGORY SELECT
Effect Reverb Type
Main Voice Reverb Send Level
Dual Voice Reverb Send Level
Split Voice Reverb Send Level
Harmony
For the first five Harmony Types
(Duet, Trio, Block, Country, and
Octave), chords must be played
in the Accompaniment area of
the keyboard.
The Harmony voice(s) change in
pitch to best match the chords
you play.
The speed of the Trill, Tremolo,
and Echo effects depends on the
Tempo setting (page 33).
Each voice of the PSR-292 has
its own independent Harmony
setting.
001
GrandPno
Indicates Harmony
effect is on.
Reverb
Twelve additional Reverb Types
are available when controlling the
PSR-292 from a MIDI device.
(For details, See page 92.)
• Each style of the PSR-292 has its
own independent Reverb setting.
Effects
32
The Chorus effect lets you enhance the sound of the voices with the use of pitch
modulation. Two basic types are provided: Chorus and Flanger. Chorus produces
a thicker, warmer, and more animated sound, whereas Flanger creates a swirling,
metallic effect. A total of four Chorus types are available. (See page 34.)
The following par
ameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76).
The DSP effect section provides distortion and chorus effects, plus a wealth of
other useful and dynamic effects for enhancing and changing the sound of the
voices. Included among these miscellaneous effects are reverse gate reverb,
phaser, rotary speaker, tremolo, echo, delay, distortion, equalization, and wah. A
total of thirty-eight DSP types are available. (See page 34.)
The following par
ameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76).
CATEGORY SELECT
Effect Chorus Type
Main Voice Chorus Send Level
Dual Voice Chorus Send Level
Split Voice Chorus Send Level
CATEGORY SELECT
Effect DSP Type
Main Voice DSP Send Level
Dual Voice DSP Send Level
Split Voice DSP Send Level
Chorus
DSP
Each voice of the PSR-292 has
its own independent DSP setting.
Fifty-one additional DSP Types
are available when controlling the
PSR-292 from a MIDI device.
(For details, see page 92.)
Effects
33
Effect Types
Harmony Types
Reverb Types
No. Harmony Type Display Name Description
1 Duet Duet Harmony types 1 - 5 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-
note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand.
These types only sound when chords are played in the auto accom-
paniment area of the keyboard.
2 Trio Trio
3 Block Block
4 Country Country
5 Octave Octave
6 Trill 1/4 note Tril1/4 Types 6 - 26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or
delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types
sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the
actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 41).
The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the ef-
fect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6
= quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-
note triplets.
• The Trill effect Types (6 - 12) create two-note trills (alternating
notes) when two notes are held.
• The Tremolo effect Types (13 - 19) repeat all held notes (up to
four).
• The Echo effect Types (20 - 26) create delayed repeats of each
note played.
7 Trill 1/6 note Tril1/6
8 Trill 1/8 note Tril1/8
9 Trill 1/12 note Tril1/12
10 Trill 1/16 note Tril1/16
11 Trill 1/24 note Tril1/24
12 Trill 1/32 note Tril1/32
13 Tremolo 1/4 note Trem1/4
14 Tremolo 1/6 note Trem1/6
15 Tremolo 1/8 note Trem1/8
16 Tremolo 1/12 note Trem1/12
17 Tremolo 1/16 note Trem1/16
18 Tremolo 1/24 note Trem1/24
19 Tremolo 1/32 note Trem1/32
20 Echo 1/4 note Echo1/4
21 Echo 1/6 note Echo1/6
22 Echo 1/8 note Echo1/8
23 Echo 1/12 note Echo1/12
24 Echo 1/16 note Echo1/16
25 Echo 1/24 note Echo1/24
26 Echo 1/32 note Echo1/32
No. Reverb Type Display Name Description
1 Hall 1 Hall1 Concert hall reverb.
2 Hall 2 Hall1
3 Room 1 Room1 Small room reverb.
4 Room 2 Room2
5 Stage 1 Stage1 Reverb for solo instruments.
6 Stage 2 Stage2
7 Plate 1 Plate1 Simulated steel plate reverb.
8 Plate 2 Plate2
9 Off Off No effect.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Effects
34
Chorus Types
DSP Types
No. Chorus Type Display Name Description
1 Chorus 1 Chorus1 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
2 Chorus 2 Chorus2
3 Flanger 1 Flanger1 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.
4 Flanger 2 Flanger2
5 Off Off No effect.
No. DSP Type Display Name Description
1 Hall 1 Hall1 Concert hall reverb.
2 Hall 2 Hall2
3 Room 1 Room1 Small room reverb.
4 Room 2 Room2
5 Stage 1 Stage1 Reverb for solo instruments.
6 Stage 2 Stage2
7 Plate 1 Plate1 Simulated steel plate reverb.
8 Plate 2 Plate2
9 Early Reflection 1 ER1 Early reflections only.
10 Early Reflection 2 ER2
11 Gate Reverb Gate1 Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special ef-
fects.
12 Reverse Gate Gate2 Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb.
13 Chorus 1 Chorus1 Conventional chorus effect with rich, warm chorusing.
14 Chorus 2 Chorus2
15 Flanger 1 Flanger1 Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.
16 Flanger 2 Flanger2
17 Symphonic Symphony Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.
18 Phaser Phaser Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.
19 Rotary Speaker 1 Rotary1 Rotary speaker simulation.
20 Rotary Speaker 2 Rotary2
21 Tremolo 1 Tremolo1 Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.
22 Tremolo 2 Tremolo2
23 Guitar Tremolo Guitar Tremolo Simulated electric guitar tremolo.
24 Auto Pan AutoPan Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right,
front, back).
25 Auto Wah AutoWah Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.
26 Delay Left - Center -
Right
DelayLCR Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.
27 Delay Left - Right DelayLR Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.
28 Echo Echo Stereo delay, with independent feedback level settings for each channel.
29 Cross Delay CrossDly Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left
and right channels.
30 Karaoke Karaoke Deep, pronounced echo effect.
31 Distortion Hard D Hard Hard-edged, warm distortion.
32 Distortion Soft D Soft Soft, warm distortion.
33 Overdrive Overdrv Natural distortion, like that of an overdriven amplifier.
34 Amp Simulation AmpSimu Characteristic sound of a guitar amplifier/speaker.
35 EQ Disco EQ Disco Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in
most disco music.
36 EQ Telephone EQ Tel Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound
heard through a telephone receiver.
37 3Band EQ 3BandEQ Equalizer with three separate frequency bands.
38 2Band EQ 2BandEQ Equalizer with two separate frequency bands.
39 No Effect Off No effect
35
Selecting and Playing Styles
The PSR-292 provides dynamic rhythm/accompaniment patterns (styles) as well as voice
settings appropriate for each style for various popular musical categories.
A total of 135 different styles are available, in several different categories. Each style is made up of separate
“sections” — Intro, Main A and B, and Ending — letting you call up different accompaniment sections as you
perform.
The auto accompaniment features that are built into the rhythms add the excitement of instrumental backing to
your performance, letting you control the accompaniment by the chords you play. Auto accompaniment effec-
tively splits the keyboard into two areas: The upper is used for playing a melody line, and the lower (set by
default to keys F#2 and lower) is for the auto accompaniment function.
The PSR-292 also features the convenient Dictionary function (page 45). Dictionary provides you with a built-
in “chord encyclopedia” that teaches you how to play any chord you specify by showing you the appropriate
notes in the display.
1 Press the [STYLE] button.
2 Select the desired style number.
The categories of each styles and their numbers are shown
on the panel. A complete style list of the available styles is
given on page 86.
Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT
buttons.
Turn the dial and select the desired style. Select the appropriate category by
using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the
desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up
through the style numbers.
Selecting a Style
Style name and number
001
8BtModrn
f
r
>
<
Selecting and Playing Styles
36
Use the numeric keypad.
Style numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24).
You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the style number, or use the
[+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the styles.
The panel buttons below function as style controls.
1 Turn on the auto accompaniment.
Press the [ACMP] button to turn on (enable) the auto accompaniment.
Playing the Styles
Pressing this button alter-
nately enables and can-
cels the Sync Stop
function. (See page 40.)
Pressing this button alter-
nately starts and stops
style playback.
Pressing this button alter-
nately enables and can-
cels the bass and chord
accompaniment. (See
below.)
This controls the Intro
and Ending sections.
(See pages 38, 39.)
Pressing this button alter-
nately enables and can-
cels the Sync Start
function. (See page 37.)
Pressing this button switches
between the Main A and Main B
sections, automatically adding a
fill-in pattern before changing the
section. (See page 42.)
001
8BtModrn
Indicates that auto
accompaniment is on.
Selecting and Playing Styles
37
2 Start the style.
You can do this in one of the following ways:
Pressing the [START/STOP] button
The rhythm starts playing immediately without bass and chord accompani-
ment. The currently selected Main A or B section will play.
You can select the Main A or B section by pressing the appropriate button —
[MAIN A/B] — before pressing the [START/STOP] button. (The display
briefly shows the letter of the selected section: “MAIN A” or “MAIN B.”)
Using Tap Tempo to Start
This useful feature lets you tap out the speed (tempo) of the style and auto-
matically start the style at that tapped speed.
Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button four times (or three times for a 3/4
time style), and the style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. You
can also change the tempo while the style is playing by tapping the
[TEMPO/TAP] button twice at the desired tempo.
Using Sync Start
The PSR-292 also has a Sync Start function that allows you to start the style
by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. To use Sync Start, first press the
[SYNC START] button (the beat marks all flash to indicate Sync Start stand-
by), then press any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on,
play a key or chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.)
MAIN A
Indicates selected section
(Main A or B).
Auto accompaniment
area
Selecting and Playing Styles
38
Starting with an Intro section
Each style has its own two- or four-measure Intro section. When used with the auto accompaniment, many of the
Intro sections also include special chord changes and embellishments to enhance your performance.
To start with an Intro section:
1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro.
2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button.
To actually start the Intro section, press the [START/STOP] button.
Using Sync Start with an Intro section
You can also use the Sync Start function with the special Intro section of the selected style.
To use Sync Start with an Intro section:
1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro.
2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button.
3) Press the [SYNC START] button to enable Sync Start, and start the Intro section and accompaniment by play-
ing any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on, play a key or chord in the auto accompani-
ment area of the keyboard.)
MAIN A
Indicates selected section
(Main A or B).
INTRO≥A
Indicates Intro standby.
MAIN A
Indicates selected section
(MAIN A or B).
INTRO≥A
Indicates Intro standby.
Auto accompaniment
area
Selecting and Playing Styles
39
3 Change chords using the auto accompaniment feature.
Try playing a few successive chords with your left hand, and notice how the
bass and chord accompaniment change with each chord you play. (Refer to
page 43 for more information on how to use auto accompaniment.)
4 Stop the style.
You can do this in one of three ways:
Pressing the [START/STOP] button
The style stops playing immediately.
Using an Ending section
Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. The style stops after the Ending section
is finished.
Pressing the [SYNC START] button
This immediately stops the style and automatically enables Sync Start, let-
ting you restart the style by simply playing a chord or key in the auto accom-
paniment area of the keyboard.
The [ACMP] button can also be
used to turn off and on the bass/
chord accompaniment while play
-
ing — allowing you to create
dynamic rhythmic breaks in your
performance.
Chords played in the auto
accompaniment area of the key-
board are also detected and
played when the style is stopped.
In effect, this gives you a “split
keyboard, with bass and chords
in the left hand and the normally
selected voice in the right.
To have the Ending section grad-
ually slow down (ritardando) as it
is playing, press the [INTRO
ENDING] button twice quickly.
END/rit.
ENDING
Selecting and Playing Styles
40
This convenient feature lets you stop (or pause) the style by releasing your fingers
from the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Playing the chord again
restarts the style. This is ideal for putting dynamic breaks in your performance —
for example, stopping the rhythm and accompaniment briefly while you play a
melodic break or solo with your right hand.
1 Press the [ACMP] button.
To turn accompaniment on.
2 Press the [SYNC STOP] button.
Setting Sync Stop to on before starting the style automatically sets Sync
Start to on as well.
3 Play a chord on the keyboard (in the auto accompaniment
area of the keyboard).
The style starts as soon as you play a chord.
4 Stop the style by releasing the chord.
5 To start the style again, play a chord.
6 To turn Sync Stop off, press the [SYNC STOP] button again.
To stop the style completely, press the [START/STOP] button.
Sync Stop
001
8BtModrn
Indicates that auto
accompaniment is on.
001
8BtModrn
Indicates that Sync
Stop is on.
Selecting and Playing Styles
41
The tempo of style playback can be adjusted over a range of 32 - 280 bpm (beats
per minute).
1 Call up the Tempo setting.
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button.
2 Change the value.
Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the
[+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value.
Changing the Tempo
When style playback is stopped
and a different style is selected,
the tempo returns to the default
setting of the new style. When
switching styles during playback,
the last tempo setting is main-
tained. (This allows you to keep
the same tempo, even when
changing styles.)
Current Tempo value
120
TEMPO
120
Restoring the Default Tempo
Value
Each song and style has been
given a default or standard Tempo
setting. If you’ve changed the
Tempo, you can instantly restore
the default setting by pressing both
[+]/[-] buttons simultaneously
(when Tempo is selected).
You can also restore the default
Tempo easily by simultaneously
holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button
and moving the dial.
You can also use the convenient
Tap Tempo function to change
the tempo by “tapping” a new one
in real time. (See page 37.)
or
Selecting and Playing Styles
42
While the style is playing, you can add variation in the rhythm/accompaniment by
pressing the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. This switches between the Main A and
Main B sections, automatically playing a fill-in pattern to smoothly lead into the
next section. For example, if the Main A section is currently playing, pressing this
button automatically plays a fill-in pattern, followed by the Main B section. (See
illustration below.)
You can also select either the Main A or B section to start by pressing the [MAIN/
AUTO FILL] button before starting the style.
The playback volume of the style can be adjusted in the Function mode (pa
ge 76).
This volume control affects only the Style volume. The volume range is 000 -
127.
Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins)
Rhythm sounds and fill-in sec-
tions are not available when one
of the Pianist styles (#124 - #135)
are selected.
This appears while the fill-in
pattern is playing.
Fill A≥B
1beat 2 3
1st measure
4 1234123412
2nd measure 3rd measure
33
...a fill-in pattern
plays immediately
until the end of the
measure...
...and the Main A
or B section
begins here.
If you press the
[MAIN/AUTO
FILL] button
before beat 4...
...a fill-in pattern
plays from here...
...and the Main
A or B section
begins here.
If you press the
[MAIN/AUTO FILL]
button here, after
beat 4...
About the Fill-in Patterns
Adjusting the Style Volume
Style Volume cannot be changed
unless the Style mode is active.
Selecting and Playing Styles
43
When it is set to on (page 36), the auto accompaniment function automatically
generates bass and chord accompaniment for you to play along with, by using
Multi Fingering operation. You can change the chords of the accompaniment by
playing keys in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard using either the
“Single Finger” or “Fingered” method. With Single Finger you can simply play a
one-, two- or three-finger chord indication (see Single Finger Chords below). The
Fingered technique is that of conventionally playing all the notes of the chord.
Whichever method you use, the PSR-292 “understands” what chord you indicate
and then automatically generates the accompaniment.
Single Finger Chords
Chords that can be produced in Single Finger operation are major, minor, seventh
and minor seventh. The illustration shows how to produce the four chord types.
(The key of C is used here as an example; other keys follow the same rules. For
example, Bb7 is played as Bb and A.)
Fingered Chords
Using the key of C as an example, the chart below shows the types of chords that
can be recognized in the Fingered mode.
Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering
C
Cm C
7
Cm
7
To play a major chord:
Press the root note of
the chord.
To play a minor chord:
Press the root note
together with the nearest
black key to the left of it.
To play a seventh chord:
Press the root note
together with the nearest
white key to the left of it.
To play a minor seventh
chord: Press the root note
together with the nearest
white and black keys to
the left of it (three keys
altogether).
C
Cm
7
C
( )
CM
( )
7
C
(9)
C
( )
(9)
6
Caug
Cm
6
Cm
7
( )
Cm
b5
7
CmM
b5
7
Cm
( )
(9)
7
Cm
(9)
CmM
7
( )
CmM
(9)
7
( )
Cdim
Cdim
7
C
(9)
7
( )
C
(13)
7
( )
C
(b9)
7
( )
C
(b13)
7
Csus
4
C
1+2+5
C
b5
7
C
6
( )
( )
CM
7
(9)
7
CM
(#11)
( )
7
CM
b5
C
(b5)
( )
C
(#11)
7
C
(#9)
7
( )
C aug
7
Cm
7
(
11)
( )
( )
CM aug
7
( )
C sus
4
7
( )
Example for C chords
* Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them.
Selecting and Playing Styles
44
Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display
Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C C
Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C(9) C(9)
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6
Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9)
Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - 7
CM7 CM7
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9)
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
CM7(#11) CM7(#11)
Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C(b5) Cb5
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4 Csus4
Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug
Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug
Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm
Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9)
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9)
Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11)
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9)
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5
Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7
Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
C7 C7
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9)
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13)
Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9)
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
C7(#11) C7(#11)
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13)
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9)
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7b5C7b5
Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4
One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C1+2+5 C
Notes in parentheses can be
omitted.
• Playing two same root keys in the
adjacent octaves produces
accompaniment based only on
the root.
A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces
accompaniment based only on
the root and fifth which can be
used with both major and minor
chords.
• The chord fingerings listed are all
in “root” position, but other inver-
sions can be used — with the fol-
lowing exceptions:
m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4, aug,
dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), 1+2+5.
Inversion of the 7sus4 and
m7(11) chords are not recog-
nized if the notes shown in
parentheses are omitted.
The auto accompaniment will
sometimes not change when
related chords are played in
sequence (e.g. some minor
chords followed by the minor sev
-
enth).
Two-note fingerings will produce
a chord based on the previously
played chord.
Selecting and Playing Styles
45
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the
individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord
and want to quickly learn how to play it.
1 Press the [DICTIONARY] button.
2 Specify the root of the chord.
Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord root (as
printed on the panel).
3 Specify the type of the chord (major, minor, seventh, etc.).
Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord type (as
printed on the panel).
Dictionary
Dict.
Pressing this key selects
the root G.
Dict.
Individual notes of chord (keyboard)
Pressing this key selects
the major seventh chord
type (M7).
Notation of chord
Chord name
(root and type)
Dict.
For a few specific chords, not all
notes may be shown in the nota-
tion section of the display. This is
due to space limitations in the
display.
You can also show the inversion
of chord when using [+]/[-] button.
Selecting and Playing Styles
46
4 Play the chord.
Play the chord (as indicated in the display) in the chord area of the keyboard.
The chord name flashes in the display when the correct notes are held down.
(Inversions for many of the chords are also recognized.)
To leave the Dictionary function, press the [DICTIONARY] button again.
What is a Chord?
The simple answer: Three or more notes played simultaneously is a chord. (Two notes played
together is an “interval” — an interval being the distance between two different notes. This is also
referred to as a “harmony.”) Depending on the intervals between the three or more notes, a chord
can sound beautiful or muddy and dissonant.
The organization of notes in the example at left — a triad chord — pro-
duces a pleasant, harmonious sound. Triads are made up of three notes
and are the most basic and common chords in most music.
In this triad, the lowest note is the “root.” The root is the most important note in the chord, because
it anchors the sound harmonically by determining its “key” and forms the basis for how we hear the
other notes of the chord.
The second note of this chord is four semitones higher than the first, and the third is three semitones
higher than the second. Keeping our root note fixed and changing these notes by a semitone up or
down (sharp or flat), we can create four different chords.
Keep in mind that we can also change the “voicing” of a chord — for example, change the order of
the notes (called “inversions”), or play the same notes in different octaves — without changing the
basic nature of the chord itself.
Dict.
Indicates notes to be
played.
Flashes when correct
notes are held.
Major chord
(ex. C)
Minor chord
(ex. Cm)
Augmented chord
(ex. Caug)
Diminished chord
(ex. Cdim)
Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd
Inversion examples for the key of C
G
E
C
C
G
E
E
C
G
Selecting and Playing Styles
47
Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner. The use of intervals and chords is one of
the most important elements in music. A wide variety of emotions and feelings can be created
depending on the types of chords used and the order in which they are arranged.
Writing Chord Names
Knowing how to read and write chord names is an easy yet invaluable skill. Chords are often writ-
ten in a kind of shorthand that makes them instantly recognizable (and gives you the freedom to
play them with the voicing or inversion that you prefer). Once you understand the basic principles
of harmony and chords, it’s very simple to use this shorthand to write out the chords of a song.
First, write the root note of the chord in an uppercase letter. If you need to specify sharp or flat,
indicate that to the right of the root. The chord type should be indicated to the right as well. Exam-
ples for the key of C are shown below.
One important point: Chords are made up of notes “stacked” on top of each other, and the stacked
notes are indicated in the chord name of the chord type as a number — the number being the dis-
tance of the note from the root. (See the keyboard diagram below.) For example, the minor 6th
chord includes the 6th note of the scale, the major 7th chord has the 7th note of the scale, etc.
The Intervals of the Scale
To better understand the intervals and the numbers
used to represent them in the chord name, study this
diagram of the C major scale:
Other Chords
Major chord
C
Minor chord
Cm
Augmented chord
Caug
Diminished chord
Cdim
For simple major chords, the type is omitted.
CDEFGABCDE
F
Root
2nd
4th
3rd
5th
7th
6th
Octave
11th
9th
Dominant 7th (flatted 7th)
Csus4
5th 4th
C7
Dominant
7th
Major chord
Cm7
Dominant
7th
Minor chord
CM7
7th Major chord
Cm7bb
bb
5
Dominant
7th
Diminished
chord
Cm6
Minor
chord
6th
C(9)
9th
* Bbb = A
Cdim7
Diminished 7th
(double flatted
7th)
Diminished
chord
48
Using the Music Database
If you want to play in a certain genre of music but dont know which style and voice settings
would be appropriate, simply select the desired genre from the Music Database. The PSR-292
automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!
1 Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button.
The MUSIC DATABASE menu appears in the display.
2 Select a Music Database.
The categories of each Music Database and their numbers are shown on the
panel. A complete list of the available styles in the Music Database is given
on page 87.
Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT
buttons.
Turn the dial and select the Music Database. Select the appropriate category
by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the
desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up
through the Music Database numbers.
Use the numeric keypad.
Music Database numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices
(page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the Music Data-
base number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the
Music Database.
Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC
DATABASE) button to automati-
cally set the Style mode, turn
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on,
and turn SYNCHRONIZED
START on. See page 37 for
details.
001
AlvFever
f
r
>
<
208
XmasWalz
Using the Music Database
49
In this example, we will select #208 “Xmas Walz” and play the Song “Silent
Night”.
3 Play the chords with your left hand and the melody lines
with your right hand along with the music.
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.
For information on how to enter chords, see “Multi Fingering” on page 43.
4 When you reach the point in the music indicated by the
arrow above, press the [ENDING] button.
The style plays an ending phrase in ritardando.
When the ending is finished, the style automatically stops.
You can also stop the style by using the [STOP] button.
Auto accompaniment
area
See pages 35 through 44 for
details about the Style.
Using the Music Database
50
Each of the Music Database settings has been specially programmed to match the selected musical
style and each features the best suited voice (or combination of voices), style and other settings.
Pressing the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button and selecting a number lets you instantly
reconfigure all relevant settings, conveniently allowing you to start playing in the desired genre
with all the appropriate sounds — without having to make each setting one by one.
M.D.B. Parameters
* Accompaniment is automatically set to on.
Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped).
Style Style Number Split Voice ON/Off
Accompaniment Split Point Voice Number
MainA/MainB Volume
Style Volume Octave
Main Voice Voice Number Pan
Volume Reverb Send Level
Octave Chorus Send Level
Pan DSP Send Level
Reverb Send Level Split Point
Chorus Send Level Effect Reverb Type
DSP Send Level Chorus Type
Dual Voice ON/Off DSP Type
Voice Number Harmony On/Off
Volume Harmony Type
Octave Harmony Volume
Pan Transpose Transpose
Reverb Send Level Tempo Tempo
Chorus Send Level
DSP Send Level
Data stored by the Music Database
51
Selecting and Playing Songs
The PSR-292 features a total of 105 songs. These include 100 songs that showcase the rich
and dynamic sounds of the instrument, and 99 of these songs can be used with the educa-
tional Lesson feature (page 61), a powerful tool that makes learning songs fun and easy.
A special Demo song has also been included, and can be played automatically by pressing the
[DEMO] button. Moreover, there are ve special User songs to which you can record your own
performance.
The User songs are empty and cannot be played until something has been recorded to them.
(For instructions on recording your own songs, see page 56.)
You can also transfer song data from your computer to the PSR-292 for playback. For details,
see page 71.
1 Press the [SONG] button.
Babbino
012
066
120
Song Playback Display
These display the notes and name of
the current chord.
Current measure number
Indicates the tracks currently playing back.
(These can be alternately muted and sounded
during playback by pressing the corresponding
SONG MEMORY buttons.)
About the Beat Display
The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time
with the rhythm of the song or style. The first
arrow indicates the first beat of the measure, and
the others flash in sequence.
First beat of
measure
Second
beat
Third
beat
Fourth
beat
Selecting a Song
001
Just You
Song name and number
Selecting and Playing Songs
52
2 Select the desired song number.
The categories of each song and their numbers are shown on the panel. A
complete list of the available songs is given on page 15.
Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT
buttons.
Turn the dial and select the desired song. Select the appropriate category by
using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the
desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up
through the song numbers.
Use the numeric keypad.
Song numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24).
You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the song number, or use the
[+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the song.
f
r
>
<
Listening to the Flash Memory Song
The PSR-292 can play a song loaded into its internal flash memory. To do this, you’ll need to connect the PSR-292
to a personal computer, and use the “Song Filer” software to transmit the song from the computer.
For more information on Flash songs and Song Filer, refer to page 71.
Select the song number 101-199 using the dial or numeric keypad in the same way as preset songs.
Selecting and Playing Songs
53
The Panel buttons below function as Song controls.
1 Start the selected song.
Press the [START/STOP] button. As the song plays back, the measure num-
ber and chords are shown in the display.
2 Stop the song.
Press the [START/STOP] button. If playback was started by pressing the
[START/STOP] button, the selected song stops automatically.
Playing the Songs
Turns on the A-B Repeat
function (page 54).
Reverses the playback
position.
Starts and stops
song playback.
Pauses playback. Advances the playback
position.
Indicates track is enabled for playing
Indicates track is muted or
contains no data
About the Song Tracks
Melody tracks Style track
The “A” track contents Style
(accompaniment) data.
Track 2 generally contents
data for the left hand.
Track 1 generally contents
data for the right hand.
Song track indicators
You can play along with the song
using the currently selected
voice, or even select a different
voice for playing along. Simply
call up the Voice mode while the
song is playing back and select
the desired voice. (See page 23.)
Selecting and Playing Songs
54
The convenient A-B Repeat function is an ideal aid for practicing and learning. It
allows you to specify a phrase of a song (between point A and point B) and repeat
it — while you play or practice along with it.
1 While playing a song, set point A (the start point).
During playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once, at the beginning
point to be repeated.
2 Set point B (the end point).
As the song continues playing, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once again,
at the ending point to be repeated. The selected phrase repeats indefinitely
until stopped.
3 Pause or stop playback as needed.
Use the [PAUSE] button or [START/STOP] button. Stopping playback does
not cancel the set A/B points or the A-B Repeat function.
4 Turn off the A-B Repeat function.
Press the [A-B REPEAT] button.
A-B Repeat
A-
REPEAT
006
006
The A and B points can only be
specified at the beginning of a
measure (beat 1), and not at any
point in the middle of a measure.
To set the A point to the begin-
ning of a song, press the [A-B
REPEAT] button before starting
playback.
If you’re repeat practicing a par-
ticularly difficult section, try slow-
ing down the Tempo to an
appropriate speed to make it eas
-
ier to play and master the part.
You may also want to slow down
the Tempo while setting the A
and B points; this makes it easier
to accurately set the points.
You can also set the A-B Repeat
function when the song is
stopped. Simply use the [REW
r
] and [FF
f
] buttons to select
the desired measures, pressing
the [A-B REPEAT] button for
each point, then start playback.
A-b
REPEAT
012
012
Selecting and Playing Songs
55
The PSR-292 lets you play a melody on the keyboard along with each of the
songs, either with the original melody voice or one of your own selection. The
convenient Melody Voice Change feature takes this one step further — it lets you
replace the original voice used for the melody of the song with the panel voice of
your own selection. For example, if the current voice selected on the panel is
piano but the song’s melody is being played by a flute voice, using Melody Voice
Change will change the flute melody voice to piano.
1 Select the desired song.
Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] but-
tons to select the desired song. (See page 51.)
2 Select the desired voice.
Press the [VOICE] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] but-
tons to select the desired voice. (See page 23.)
3 Press and hold down the [VOICE] button for at least one
second.
“MELODY VOICE CHANGE” appears in the display, indicating that the
selected panel voice has replaced the song’s original melody voice.
The playback volume of the song can be adjusted in the Function mode (pa
ge 76).
This volume control affects only the Song volume. The volume range is 000 -
127.
Melody Voice Change
MELODY V
Adjusting the Song Volume
• Song Volume cannot be changed
unless the Song mode is active.
(This function becomes Style Vol
-
ume when the Style mode is
active.)
56
Song Recording
The PSR-292 features powerful and easy-to-use song recording features that let you record
your keyboard performances — using up to six independent tracks (including one track for
accompaniment) — for creating your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions. You can
record and save up to five User songs.
Song recording on the PSR-292 is similar to using a tape recorder; whatever you
play on the keyboard is recorded in real time as you play it. Also, when you
record subsequent parts to other tracks, you can hear the previously recorded parts
as you record new ones.
Data that can be recorded to the normal (melody) tracks:
• Note on/off • Chorus Type*
• Velocity DSP Type*
Voice Number • Sustain
• Reverb Type* Tempo*, Time Signature* (if there is no such data in the Chord track)
Data that can be recorded to the Chord track:
• Style number*
• Chord changes and timing
• Changing sections (Intro, Main A/B, etc.)
• Style Volume*
• Tempo, Time Signature*
1
Make all desired PSR-292 settings.
Before you actually start recording, you’ll need to make various settings for
the song — such as selecting a style, setting the Tempo, and selecting a
voice. (See pages 35, 41, and 23.)
If desired, also make other settings. Refer to the list above for settings that
can be recorded to a song.
rEC
User 1
001
Song Memory Capacity
Maximum number of notes :
approximately 10,000 (when only
“melody” tracks are recorded)
Maximum number of chords :
approximately 5,500 (when only
the chord track is recorded)
Recording a User Song
* These settings can only be recorded once at the beginning of a song; other
settings can be changed in the middle of a song.
When using a Split Voice for
recording, the voice assigned to
the left of the split point cannot
be recorded.
Using the Metronome
You can use the Metronome instead of a style if desired. This allows you to keep your performance “in time,” even
when recording without style. To do this, press the [METRONOME] button before recording in step #4 below.
After the song is completely recorded, simply play back the song with the Metronome turned off. (See page 20.)
Song Recording
57
2 Select a User song number for recording.
Use the dial or numeric keypad to select the desired song: 201 - 205. If no
song is manually selected, the PSR-292 automatically selects the first avail-
able empty song number.
3 Select a track number for recording.
While holding down the [REC] button, press the appropriate SONG MEM-
ORY button.
Recording to the Chord Track
A special Chord track is provided for recording accompaniment data. This is
automatically recorded to the Chord track (track A). Selecting the Chord
track automatically turns on the accompaniment.
Recording to a Melody Track (1 - 5)
Five independent Melody tracks are provided for recording your keyboard
performance. Normally, you’ll want to record these after you’ve recorded
the Chord track. You can also record the Chord track and one of the Melody
tracks simultaneously.
202
User 2
or
rEC
User 2
001
Keep in mind that all recording
operations “replace” the data.
In other words, if you record to
a track that already has
recorded data, all previous
data in the track will be erased
and replaced by the newly
recorded data.
If accompaniment has already
been turned on before entering
the Record mode, the Chord
track is automatically selected.
Song Recording
58
4 Start recording.
When the beat marks and track number start flashing, you can start recording
simply by playing the keyboard (or by pressing the [START/STOP] button).
If you want to rehearse your part before recording, press the [SYNC START]
button to turn Sync Start off. After rehearsing, press [SYNC START] again
to return to the above condition.
When recording the Chord track
With Sync Start on, play the first chord of the song in the auto accompani-
ment area of the keyboard. The accompaniment starts automatically and you
can continue recording, playing other chords in time with the accompani-
ment.
5 Stop recording.
After you’ve finished playing the part, press the [START/STOP] or [REC]
button.
6 Record to other tracks as desired.
To do this, simply repeat steps #3 - #5 above. Make sure that when you press
the SONG MEMORY button corresponding to the desired track, the track
number in the display flashes.
7 Listen to your new recording.
To play back the song from the beginning, simply press the [START/STOP]
button again. Playback stops when the [START/STOP] button is pressed
again.
Muting Tracks During Playback
While recording is enabled, you can selectively mute different tracks. This is useful for when you want to clearly
hear certain tracks, and not others, during recording. Muting can also be done “on the fly” during playback. To use
muting, press the corresponding SONG MEMORY button, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired track number
in the display is off.
Each press of a SONG MEMORY button (when playback is stopped) cycles through the following settings:
Track number flashes — Track will record.*
* Cannot be selected during playback.
Track number off — Track is muted.
Track number on — Track will play back.
rEC
User 2
001
001
Indicates the current
measure
Song Recording
59
The Song Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on all tracks of a
selected User song. Use this operation only when you’re sure you want to erase a
song and record a new one. To erase an individual track of a song while leaving
the other tracks intact, use the Track Clear operation (page 60).
1 Select the desired song.
Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to
select the desired song (201 - 205).
2 While holding down the [A] button, press SONG MEMORY
button [1].
All track indications in the display flash, indicating that all tracks are to be
erased.
3 Press the [+/YES] button.
4 At the Sure? prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press
the [-/NO] button to abort.
Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Song Clear operation.
Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts.
Song Clear
202
User 2
YES
ClrUser2
WRITING!
Song Recording
60
The Track Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on a selected track
of a selected User song, leaving the other tracks intact. Use this operation only
when you’re sure you want to erase a track and record a new one. To erase the
data of an entire song, use the Song Clear operation (page 59).
1 Select the desired song.
Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to
select the desired song (201 - 205).
2 Press and hold down the button corresponding to the track
to be erased.
Press and hold down the appropriate SONG MEMORY button ([1] - [5],
[A]) for at least one second.
3 Press the [+/YES] button.
4 At the Sure? prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press
the [-/NO] button to abort.
Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Track Clear operation.
Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts.
Track Clear
202
User 2
YES
ClrTr1
WRITING!
61
Song Lesson
The Lesson feature provides an exceptionally fun and easy-to-use way to learn how to read
music and play the keyboard. Lesson lets you practice the left- and right-hand parts of each
song independently, step by step, until youve mastered them and are ready to practice with
both hands together. These practices are divided into four Lesson steps, as described below.
Lessons 1 - 3 apply to each hand; press the appropriate button, [L] (left) or [R] (right) to select
the desired part for practice.
Naturally, you can also use Song data you’ve loaded from computer with the Lesson fea-
tures.
Lesson 1 Timing
This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note
can be used, as long as you play in rhythm.
Lesson 2 Waiting
In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes
before continuing playback of the song.
Lesson 3 Minus One
This lesson step plays back the song with one part muted, letting you play
and master the missing part yourself — in rhythm and at the proper tempo.
Lesson 4 Both Hands
Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3,
except that both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play
and master both hands at the same time.
1 Select one of the Lesson songs.
Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial or numeric keypad or [+]/[-] but-
tons to select the desired song.
The songs are divided into several different categories or music genres.
Using the Lesson Feature
036
FurElise
or
Song Lesson
62
2 Select the part you wish to work on (left or right) and the
Lesson step.
If you want to work on the right-hand part, press the [R] button; to work on
the left, press the [L] button. Pressing either button repeatedly cycles
through the available Lesson steps in order: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson
3 Off Lesson 1, etc. The selected Lesson step is indicated in the dis-
play.
To select Lesson 4, press both [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously.
3 Start the Lesson.
The Lesson and song playback start automatically (following a lead-in
count) as soon as the Lesson step is selected. When the Lesson is finished,
your performance “grade” is shown in the display (if the Grade function is
turned on; page 65). After a short pause, the Lesson begins again automati-
cally.
4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the Lesson.
The PSR-292 exits from the Lesson feature automatically when the [START/
STOP] button is pressed.
r1
Timing
r2
Waiting
r3
MinusOne
036
FurElise
(Song Lesson off)
L1
Timing
L2
Waiting
L3
MinusOne
036
FurElise
(Song Lesson off)
Lr4
BothHand
r1
****
001
å
060
Asterisks appear indicating the tim-
ing at which you should play the
notes. The line of asterisks repre-
sents one full measure. Sixteenth
notes are indicated by an alternating
asterisk and sharp sign.
Song Lesson
63
This function allows you to select the track number of a loaded song from com-
puter (only SMF format 0).
The tr
ack number of the song can be specified in the Function mode (page 76).
This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note can be
used, as long as you play in rhythm. Pick a note to play. For the left hand, use a
note in the auto accompaniment area or play the appropriate left-hand note; for
the right, play a note above F#2. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time
with the rhythmic accompaniment.
1 Select one of the Lesson songs.
2 Select Lesson 1.
Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 1 is indicated
.
3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song.
After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes
appear in the display. In Lesson 1, simply play one note repeatedly in time
with the music.
Regarding chords and the use of the left hand, the PSR-292 actually has two
different types of songs: 1) songs with normal left-hand chords, and 2) songs
in which the left hand plays arpeggios or melodic figures in combination
with the right.
In the case of the first type, play the chords with your left hand in the auto
accompaniment area of the keyboard.
Select the Lesson Track
Lesson 1 — Timing
The melody note does not sound
unless your playing is in time with
the rhythm.
r1
Timing
Auto accompaniment
area
Song Lesson
64
In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes before con-
tinuing playback of the song. This lets you practice reading the music at your
own pace. The notes to be played are shown in the display, one after another, as
you play them correctly.
1 Select one of the Lesson songs.
2 Select Lesson 2.
Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 2 is indi-
cated.
3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song.
After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes
appear in the display. In Lesson 2, play the correct notes at your own pace,
until you can master playing them in rhythm.
This lesson step lets you practice one part of the song in rhythm at the proper
tempo. The PSR-292 plays back the song accompaniment with one part muted
(either the left part or the right)— letting you play and master the missing part
yourself. The notes you are to play are shown continuously in the display as the
song plays back.
1 Select one of the Lesson songs.
2 Select Lesson 3.
Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 3 is indi-
cated.
Lesson 2 — Waiting
r2
Waiting
Lesson 3 — Minus One
r3
MinusOne
Song Lesson
65
3 Play the appropriate part with the song.
After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes
appear in the display. In Lesson 3, listen carefully to the un-muted part, and
play the muted part yourself.
Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3, except that
both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play and master both
hands at the same time. Go on to this lesson step after you’ve mastered each
hand’s part in the previous three lesson steps. Practice both hands in time with the
rhythm along with the notation in the display.
1 Select one of the Lesson songs.
2 Select Lesson 4.
Press the [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously, so that Lesson 4 is indicated.
3 Play both the left- and right-hand parts with the song.
After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes
appear in the display. In Lesson 4, both parts (left and right) are muted, let-
ting you play the entire song by yourself.
The Lesson feature has a built-in evaluation function that monitors your practicing
of the Lesson songs, and just like a real teacher, it tells you how well you did each
exercise. Four grades are assigned, depending on your performance: “OK,
“Good,” “Very Good,” and “Excellent.
The e
valuation function can be set to on/off in the Function mode (page 76).
Lesson 4 — Both Hands
Lr4
BothHand
Grade
Grade is automatically set to on
as the default setting.
66
MIDI Functions
The PSR-292 is MIDI-compatible, featuring MIDI IN and MIDI OUT terminals and providing a
variety of MIDI-related controls. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your musical
possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your PSR-292.
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instru-
ment.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s
consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instru-
ments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a ham-
mer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a
string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a
note?
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit)
is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the
information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on
the PSR-292 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated
note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as
“with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,
and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a
number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the
tone generator plays the stored sampling note.
Example of Keyboard Information
Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) and
note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong) 20 (strong)
What Is MIDI?
Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
Based on playing information from the keyboard, a
sampling note stored in the tone generator is played
through the speakers.
LR
Tone Generator
(Electronic circuit)
Sampling
Note
Sampling
Note
Playing the keyboard
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible
music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufac-
turer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level
1. The PSR-292 supports GM System Level 1.
MIDI Functions
67
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which
allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by send-
ing and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various
other types of MIDI data, or messages.
The PSR-292 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and var-
ious types of controller data. The PSR-292 can be controlled by the incoming
MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI
channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the
voices specified for the various parts.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System
messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which
the PSR-292 can receive/transmit.
Channel Messages
The PSR-292 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is usu-
ally expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages
transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16
channels.
System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages
include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each
instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.
The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-292 are shown in the MIDI Imple-
mentation Chart on page 90.
Message Name PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting
Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each
message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the
key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the
key is stuck.
Program Change Voice number (along with corresponding bank select MSB/LSB set-
tings, if necessary).
Control Change Messages that are used to change some aspect of the sound (mod-
ulation, volume, pan, etc.).
Message Name PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting
Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc.
Realtime Messages Start/stop operation
MIDI Terminals
In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple
devices, each device must be connected by a cable.
The MIDI terminals of the PSR-292 are located on the
rear panel.
MIDI IN Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.
MIDI OUT Transmits the PSR-292’s keyboard information as MIDI data
to another MIDI device.
Special MIDI cables (sold sepa-
rately) must be used for connect-
ing to MIDI devices. They can be
bought at music stores, etc.
Never use MIDI cables longer
than about 15 meters. Cables
longer than this can pick up noise
which can cause data errors.
MIDI Functions
68
By connecting your PSR-292’s MIDI terminals to a personal computer, you can
have access to a wide variety of music software.
When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal
computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal com-
puter and the PSR-292.
When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series com-
puter, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem
or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, as shown in the dia-
gram below.
When connecting to a computer with a USB interface, use the
Yamaha UX16 USB/MIDI Interface. Connect the UX16 and the com-
puter with a standard USB cable, then make the proper MIDI con-
nections between the PSR-292 and the UX16.
Connecting to a Personal Computer
MIDI INMIDI OUT
MIDI OUTMIDI IN
PSR-292
Computer
(sequencer software)
MIDI IN
RS-422
MIDI OUT
MIDI Interface
PSR-292
Computer
(sequencer software)
When using a Macintosh series
computer, set the MIDI interface
clock setting in the application
software to match the setting of
the MIDI interface you are using.
For details, refer to the owner’s
manual for the software you are
using.
Viewing the Notation for MIDI
Channel 1
The PSR-292 has a special func-
tion that lets you view the notes
of the MIDI data (channel 1 only)
on the display.
IN
OUT
PSR-292
MIDI IN
USB
MIDI OUT
UX16
Computer
(sequencer software)
MIDI Functions
69
This function lets you enable or disable keyboard control over the PSR-292’s
voices in the Function mode (page 76). This would come in handy, for example,
when recording notes to MIDI sequencer. If you are using the sequencer to play
back the voices of the PSR-292, you would want to set this to “off” — in order to
avoid getting “double” notes, both from the keyboard and from the sequencer.
Normally, when playing the PSR-292 by itself, this should be set to “on.
The most common use for the Initial Setup Send function is in recording a song
on a sequencer that is intended for playback with the PSR-292. Essentially, this
takes a “snapshot” of the PSR-292 settings and sends that data to the sequencer.
By recording this “snapshot” at the start of the song (before any actual perfor-
mance data), you can instantly restore the necessary settings on the PSR-292 in
the Function mode (pa
ge 76). Provided there is a pause in the song, you could
also do this in the middle of a song — for example, completely changing the PSR-
292 settings for the next section of the song.
This determines whether the style and song playback functions are controlled by
the PortaTone’s internal clock (off) or by MIDI clock data from an external
sequencer or computer (on).
This should be set to on when you want to have style or song playback follow the
external device (such as a rhythm machine or a sequencer). The default setting is
off.
These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa
ge 76).
This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another device (such
as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer).
These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa
ge 76).
Bulk Data Receive
Send the Bulk Data from computer or sequencer to the PSR-292.
Local Control
No sound is output from the
PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF
is set to OFF.
Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer
When the Initial Setup Send
operation is completed, the PSR-
292 automatically returns to the
previous panel condition.
External Clock
If External Clock is set to ON,
style or song playback will not
start unless external clock are
received.
Bulk Data Send
Keep in mind that all recorded
Song data and One Touch Set-
ting data operations replace
the data.
MIDI Functions
70
This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is transmit-
ted via MIDI OUT or not.
These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa
ge 76).
This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.
These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa
ge 76).
This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.
These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa
ge 76).
Keyboard Out
Style Out
Song Out
For the Song #001, data is not
transmitted.
MIDI LSB Receive Cancel
Determines whether the LSB data of Bank Select is received or not. Press and hold the lowest key and turn on the
power to change the setting (LSB is ignored).
To restore MIDI LSB Receive Cancel to normal (LSB is recognized), turn on the power again normally.
MIDI Functions
71
The PSR-292’s internal flash memory enables you to save song data transmitted from a connected per-
sonal computer. You can play or practice Flash songs (saved in flash memory) in the same way as preset
songs.
To transmit song data from a personal computer to the PSR-292, you first need to install the “Song
Filer” application to your computer.
Installing Song Filer
You can download the “Song Filer” application from the following Yamaha PK
CLUB website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection.
Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page)
http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/
Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory
Song data that can be saved in ash memory:
The number of songs: max. 99 songs (Song #101–#199)
• Available memory: 352 KB
• Data format: SMF format 0
Visit the Yamaha PK CLUB web-
site for more information on the
latest version of Song Filer (ver-
sion 2.0.0 or higher) and how to
install it.
System requirements for Song Filer:
[Windows]
OS: Windows 95/98/Me/2000
CPU: Pentium/100MHz or faster
Available Memory: 8MB or more
Free space in Hard Disk: 2MB or more
Display: 800 x 600, 256 colors or more
[Macintosh]
OS: Mac OS 7.5 or upper
CPU: Power PC or upper
Available Memory: 8MB or more
Free space in Hard Disk: 2MB or more
Display: 800 x 600, 256 colors or more
MIDI Functions
72
Song Filer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
After you install Song Filer and connect the PSR-292 to the computer, you can
use the two functions described below.
Transmit Files
You can transmit song files from your computer to your PSR-292’s Flash
Memory.
Manage Files on Flash Memory
You can delete and rename files in your PSR-292’s Flash Memory from your
computer.
Refer to page 68 for information
on connecting the PSR-292 to a
computer.
You cannot use the Song Filer’s
“Receive Files” function with the
PSR-292.
For more information on using
Song Filer, refer to the PDF man-
ual included in the Song Filer
application.
PSR-292
Computer
Transmit
Never attempt to turn the
power off while transmitting
song data. Doing so will not
only result in failure to save
the data, but also make the
internal flash memory unsta-
ble. It may also clear all the
data residing in the flash mem
-
ory when turning the power on
and off.
Saved data in the instrument
may be lost due to malfunction
or incorrect operation. Retain
important data to your com-
puter or floppy disk.
abcd.mid
Delete
abcd.mid
efgh.mid
Rename
Selecting a right & left hand guide track
You can select a track in the Function mode (page 76) to guide your right and left hand fingering during the Lesson
(page 63).
This function is available only when you select a flash memory song (SMF format 0).
MIDI Functions
73
The PC Mode lets you instantly reconfigure the MIDI control settings for use with
a computer or MIDI device.
Default settings
To turn the PC mode on or off:
Press the [PC] button and then press the appropriate [+]/[-] button. This switches
between the PC Mode on/off settings.
To store the PC mode parameters:
1 Change the PC mode parameters.
Change the desired MIDI parameters in the Function mode.
The following PC Mode parameters can be stored to memory.
LOCAL ON/OFF
EXTERNAL
KEYBOARD
STYLE OUT
SONG OUT
2 Store the parameters to the PC memory.
Press and hold the [PC] button until “WRITING!” appears in the LCD.
PC mode is on PC mode is off
LOCAL ON/OFF ON
EXTERNAL CLOCK OFF
KEYBOARD OUT ON
STYLE OUT OFF ON
SONG OUT OFF
PC Mode
on
PC Mode
No sound is output from the
PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF
is set to OFF.
If External Clock is set to ON,
style or song playback will not
start unless external clock are
received.
WRITING!
74
Function
The PSR-292 has a variety of settings in the Function parameters.
These give you detailed control over many of the PSR-292s features.
1 Press the Function button.
2 Select a Function name.
Use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to select a Function name.
3 Input the appropriate value or use the [+]/[-] buttons to set
the selected Function.
You can also use the dial.
Using the Function parameters
OVERALL
To save the Function parameters
and the Touch on/off status to
internal memory (flash memory),
press and hold the [FUNCTION]
button. (See page 78.)
Use the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ]
buttons when selecting the cate-
gory steps.
f
r
>
<
104
M.Volume
or
Function
75
Function parameters
CATEGORY SELECT Display Range/
Settings
Description
Overall Transpose Transpos -12–12 This determines the transposition of the entire PSR-292 sound. *
Tuning Tuning -100–100 This determines the pitch of the entire PSR-292 sound . *
Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 This determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split
“point” — in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main
(upper) voices. (The Split voice sounds up to and including the Split Point
key.) The default Split Point is 054 (F#2). The Split Point setting and Ac-
companiment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.
*
Touch
Sensitivity
TouchSns 1–3 A setting of “1” results in limited touch response; this setting produces a
relatively narrow dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you
play the keys. “2” lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud),
while “3” is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly
more detailed control in the soft volume range. When Touch is turned off
(page 30), a constant velocity value of 80 is produced (total velocity range
= 0–127).
*
Main Voice Volume M.Volume 0–127 This determines the volume of the Main voice, letting you create an opti-
mum mix with the Dual or Split voice.
*
Octave M.Octave -2–2
(octave)
This determines the octave range for the Main voice. Use this to set the
most suitable range for the Main voice.
*
Pan M.Pan
0 (full left)–64
(center) –127
(full right)
This determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. *
Reverb
Send
Level
M.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Re-
verb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect.
*
Chorus
Send
Level
M.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Cho-
rus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect.
*
DSP Send
Level
M.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP
effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect.
*
Dual Voice Voice D.Voice 1–605 This select the dual voice.
Volume D.Volume 0–127 This determines the volume of the Dual voice, letting you create an opti-
mum mix with the Main voice.
*
Octave D.Octave -2–2
(octave)
This determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Use this to create
an octave layer with the Main voice.
*
Pan D.Pan
0 (full left)–64
(center) –127
(full right)
This determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image.
For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the
Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value.
*
Reverb
Send
Level
D.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Re-
verb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Dual
voice.
*
Chorus
Send
Level
D.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Cho-
rus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Dual
voice.
*
DSP Send
Level
D.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP
effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Dual voice.
*
Split Voice Voice S.Voice 1–605 This select the split voice.
Volume S.Volume 0–127 This determines the volume of the Split voice, letting you create an opti-
mum mix with the Main voice.
*
Octave S.Octave -2–2
(octave)
This determines the octave range for the Split voice. Use this to set the
most suitable range for the Split (lower) voice.
*
Pan S.Pan
0 (full left)–64
(center) –127
(full right)
This determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image.
For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the
Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value.
*
Reverb
Send
Level
S.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Split voice.
*
Chorus
Send
Level
S.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Split voice.
*
DSP Send
Level
S.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the DSP
effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Split voice.
*
* The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously.
Function
76
* The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously.
Effect Reverb
Type
Reverb 1–9 This determines the Reverb type, including “off.”
(See the list on page 33).
*
Chorus
Type
Chorus
1–5
This determines the Chorus type, including “off.”
(See the list on page 34).
*
DSP Type DSP 1–39 This determines the DSP type, including “off.”
(See the list on page 34).
*
Harmony Harmony
Type
HarmType 1–26 This determines the Harmony type.
(See the list on page 33).
*
Harmony
Volume
HarmVol 0–127 This determines the level of the Harmony effect when Harmony type 1-5
is selected, letting you create the optimum mix with the original melody
note.
*
MIDI Local On/
Off
Local On/Off This determines the Local on or off.
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Local Control to on or off.
External
Clock
ExtClock On/Off This determines the External clock or Internal clock.
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set External clock or Internal clock.
Bulk Data
Send
BulkSend YES/NO This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another de-
vice (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer).
Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data.
Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission.
Initial
Setup
Send
InitSend YES/NO This lets you save PortaTone initial data to another device (such as a se-
quencer, computer, or MIDI data filer).
Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data.
Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission.
Keyboard
Out
KbdOut On/Off This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is
transmitted or not.
Use the [+]/[-] buttons to change the setting.
Style Out StyleOut On/Off This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set the Style Out to on or off.
Song Out SongOut On/Off This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Song Out to on or off. (For song #001, data
is not transmitted.)
Volume Style StyleVol 0–127 This determines the volume of the style, letting you create an optimum
mix with your performance.
*
Song Song8Vol 0–127 This determines the volume of the Song. *
Metronome Volume Mtr8Vol 0–127 This determines the volume of the Metronome. *
Time
Signature
Time8Sig 0–15 This determines the time signature of the Metronome. *
Lesson Lesson
Track (R)
R-Part 1–16 This determines the track number for your right hand lesson.
This setting is effective only loaded song.
*
Lesson
Track (L)
L-Part 1–16 This determines the track number for your left hand lesson.
This setting is effective only loaded song.
*
Utility Grade On/
Off
Grade On/Off This determines whether Grade function is on or off.
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Grade to on or off.
Demo and
DJ Cancel
D-Cancel On/Off This determines the Demo and DJ cancel is enabled or not.
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Demo and DJ Cancel to on or off.
CATEGORY SELECT Display Range/
Settings
Description
77
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the PSR-292 is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the PSR-292 is receiving electrical
power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-292 may produce
interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it fur-
ther away from the PSR-292.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is
played or when a song is being played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on
the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack,
no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 69.)
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard
does not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 45), the keys in the right
hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type.
The sound of the voices or rhythms seems unusu-
al or strange.
The battery power is too low. Replace the batteries. (See page 10.)
The auto accompaniment doesn’t turn on, even
when pressing the [ACMP] button.
Make sure the Style mode is active before using the auto accompa-
niment. Press the [STYLE] button to enable style operations.
The style or song does not play back even when
pressing the [START/STOP] button.
Check the External Clock on/off. (See page 69.)
The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 42) is set to an appropriate
level.
Make sure that the Split Point (page 27) is set to an appropriate value.
When playing back one of the Pianist styles (#124
- #135), the rhythm cannot be heard.
This is normal. The Pianist styles have no drums or bass — only pi-
ano accompaniment. The accompaniment of the style can only be
heard when accompaniment is set to ON and keys are played in the
auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off.
The PSR-292 is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual
voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back
at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”)
from the accompaniment or song.
A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs
when using the PSR-292 with a sequencer. (This
may also sound like a “dual” layered sound of two
voices, even when Dual is turned off.)
When using the style with a sequencer, set MIDI Echo (or the relevant
control) to “off.” (Refer to the owner’s manual of your particular de-
vice and/or software for details.)
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the
opposite effect. For example, pressing the foot-
switch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains
the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-
switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning
on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (sam-
ples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the ac-
tual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
78
Data Backup & Initialization
Data Backup
The following data can be stored to internal flash memory as data backup.
Data Initialization
All Data Initialization
All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by
turning on the power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key and
highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard. “All Mem CLr” will appear
briefly on the display.
Loaded Song Initializaion
You can erase only the loaded song data by turning on the power while hold-
ing the highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard.
Group Parameter
SONG User Song Data
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
See page 28.
PC PC Memory
FUNCTION Tuning
Split Point
Touch Sensitivity
Style Volume
Song Volume
Metronome Volume
Grade On/Off
Demo & DJ Cancel
Touch Touch On/Off
About the Internal Flash Memory
The Song, One Touch Setting and PC pa-
rameters are automatically stored when
each saving operation is done.
Function and touch On/Off are stored when
Pressing and Holding the Function button.
Never attempt to turn the
power off when a “WRITING!”
message is shown in the dis-
play. Doing so can damage the
internal flash memory and
result in loss of data.
All data listed above, plus
loaded song data, will be
erased and/or changed when
the All Data Initialization proce
-
dure is carried out.
Carrying out the data initializa-
tion procedure will usually
restore normal operation if the
PSR-292 freezes or begins to
act erratically for any reason.
CLr
All Mem
79
Voice List
Maximum Polyphony
The PSR-292 has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a
maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto
Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto Accompani-
ment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is
correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions.
The Voice List includes MIDI pro-
gram change numbers for each
voice. Use these program
change numbers when playing
the PSR-292 via MIDI from an
external device.
Some voices may sound continu-
ously or have a long decay after
the notes have been released
while the sustain pedal (foot-
switch) is held.
Panel Voice List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
PIANO
001 0 112 0 Grand Piano
002 0 112 1 Bright Piano
003 0 112 3 Honky-tonk Piano
004 0 112 2 MIDI Grand Piano
005 0 113 2 CP 80
006 0 112 6 Harpsichord
E.PIANO
007 0 114 4 Galaxy EP
008 0 112 4 Funky Electric Piano
009 0 112 5 DX Modern Elec. Piano
010 0 113 5 Hyper Tines
011 0 114 5 Venus Electric Piano
012 0 112 7 Clavi
ORGAN
013 0 112 16 Jazz Organ 1
014 0 113 16 Jazz Organ 2
015 0 112 17 Click Organ
016 0 116 16 Bright Organ
017 0 112 18 Rock Organ
018 0 114 18 Purple Organ
019 0 118 16 16'+2' Organ
020 0 119 16 16'+4' Organ
021 0 114 16 Theater Organ
022 0 112 19 Church Organ
023 0 113 19 Chapel Organ
024 0 112 20 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
025 0 113 21 Traditional Accordion
026 0 112 21 Musette Accordion
027 0 113 23 Bandoneon
028 0 112 22 Harmonica
GUITAR
029 0 112 24 Classical Guitar
030 0 112 25 Folk Guitar
031 0 113 25 12Strings Guitar
032 0 112 26 Jazz Guitar
033 0 113 26 Octave Guitar
034 0 112 27 Clean Guitar
035 0 117 27 60’s Clean Guitar
036 0 112 28 Muted Guitar
037 0 112 29 Overdriven Guitar
038 0 112 30 Distortion Guitar
BASS
039 0 112 32 Acoustic Bass
040 0 112 33 Finger Bass
041 0 112 34 Pick Bass
042 0 112 35 Fretless Bass
043 0 112 36 Slap Bass
044 0 112 38 Synth Bass
045 0 113 38 Hi-Q Bass
046 0 113 39 Dance Bass
STRINGS
047 0 112 48 String Ensemble
048 0 112 49 Chamber Strings
049 0 112 50 Synth Strings
050 0 113 49 Slow Strings
051 0 112 44 Tremolo Strings
052 0 112 45 Pizzicato Strings
053 0 112 55 Orchestra Hit
054 0 112 40 Violin
055 0 112 42 Cello
056 0 112 43 Contrabass
057 0 112 105 Banjo
058 0 112 46 Harp
CHOIR
059 0 112 52 Choir
060 0 113 52 Vocal Ensemble
061 0 112 53 Vox Humana
062 0 112 54 Air Choir
SAXOPHONE
063 0 112 64 Soprano Sax
064 0 112 65 Alto Sax
065 0 112 66 Tenor Sax
066 0 114 66 Breathy Tenor
067 0 112 67 Baritone Sax
068 0 112 68 Oboe
069 0 112 69 English Horn
070 0 112 70 Bassoon
071 0 112 71 Clarinet
TRUMPET
072 0 112 56 Trumpet
073 0 112 59 Muted Trumpet
074 0 112 57 Trombone
075 0 113 57 Trombone Section
076 0 112 60 French Horn
077 0 112 58 Tuba
BRASS
078 0 112 61 Brass Section
079 0 113 61 Big Band Brass
080 0 119 61 Mellow Horns
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
Voice List
80
XG Voice List
081 0 112 62 Synth Brass
082 0 113 62 Jump Brass
083 0 114 62 Techno Brass
FLUTE
084 0 112 73 Flute
085 0 112 72 Piccolo
086 0 112 75 Pan Flute
087 0 112 74 Recorder
088 0 112 79 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
089 0 112 80 Square Lead
090 0 112 81 Sawtooth Lead
091 0 112 85 Voice Lead
092 0 112 98 Star Dust
093 0 112 100 Brightness
094 0 115 81 Analogon
095 0 119 81 Fargo
SYNTH PAD
096 0 112 88 Fantasia
097 0 113 100 Bell Pad
098 0 112 91 Xenon Pad
099 0 112 94 Equinox
100 0 113 89 Dark Moon
PERCUSSION
101 0 112 11 Vibraphone
102 0 112 12 Marimba
103 0 112 13 Xylophone
104 0 112 114 Steel Drums
105 0 112 8 Celesta
106 0 112 14 Tubular Bells
107 0 112 47 Timpani
108 0 112 10 Music Box
DRUM KITS
109 127 0 0 Standard Kit 1
110 127 0 1 Standard Kit 2
111 127 0 8 Room Kit
112 127 0 16 Rock Kit
113 127 0 24 Electronic Kit
114 127 0 25 Analog Kit
115 127 0 27 Dance Kit
116 127 0 32 Jazz Kit
117 127 0 40 Brush Kit
118 127 0 48 Symphony Kit
119 126 0 0 SFX Kit 1
120 126 0 1 SFX Kit 2
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
PIANO
121 0 0 0 Grand Piano
122 0 1 0 Grand Piano KSP
123 0 18 0 Mellow Grand Piano
124 0 40 0 Piano Strings
125 0 41 0 Dream
126 0 0 1 Bright Piano
127 0 1 1 Bright Piano KSP
128 0 0 2 Electric Grand Piano
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
129 0 1 2 Electric Grand Piano KSP
130 0 32 2 Detuned CP80
131 0 40 2 Layered CP 1
132 0 41 2 Layered CP 2
133 0 0 3 Honky-tonk Piano
134 0 1 3 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
135 0 0 4 Electric Piano 1
136 0 1 4 Electric Piano 1 KSP
137 0 18 4 Mellow Electric Piano 1
138 0 32 4 Chorus Electric Piano 1
139 0 40 4 Hard Electric Piano
1400454
Velocity Crossfade Electric
Piano 1
141 0 64 4 60’s Electric Piano 1
142 0 0 5 Electric Piano 2
143 0 1 5 Electric Piano 2 KSP
144 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 2
145 0 33 5 DX Electric Piano Hard
146 0 34 5 DX Legend
147 0 40 5 DX Phase Electric Piano
148 0 41 5 DX + Analog Electric Piano
149 0 42 5 DX Koto Electric Piano
1500455
Velocity Crossfade Electric
Piano 2
151 0 0 6 Harpsichord
152 0 1 6 Harpsichord KSP
153 0 25 6 Harpsichord 2
154 0 35 6 Harpsichord 3
155 0 0 7 Clavi
156 0 1 7 Clavi KSP
157 0 27 7 Clavi Wah
158 0 64 7 Pulse Clavi
159 0 65 7 Pierce Clavi
CHROMATIC
160 0 0 8 Celesta
161 0 0 9 Glockenspiel
162 0 0 10 Music Box
163 0 64 10 Orgel
164 0 0 11 Vibraphone
165 0 1 11 Vibraphone KSP
166 0 45 11 Hard Vibraphone
167 0 0 12 Marimba
168 0 1 12 Marimba KSP
169 0 64 12 Sine Marimba
170 0 97 12 Balimba
171 0 98 12 Log Drums
172 0 0 13 Xylophone
173 0 0 14 Tubular Bells
174 0 96 14 Church Bells
175 0 97 14 Carillon
176 0 0 15 Dulcimer
177 0 35 15 Dulcimer 2
178 0 96 15 Cimbalom
179 0 97 15 Santur
ORGAN
180 0 0 16 DrawOrg
181 0 32 16 DetDrawOrg
182 0 33 16 60sDrawOrg1
183 0 34 16 60sDrawOrg2
184 0 35 16 70sDrawOrg1
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
Voice List
81
185 0 36 16 DrawOrg2
186 0 37 16 60sDrawOrg3
187 0 38 16 Even Bar
188 0 40 16 16+2"2/3
189 0 64 16 Organ Bass
190 0 65 16 70sDrawOrg2
191 0 66 16 Cheezy Organ
192 0 67 16 DrawOrg3
193 0 0 17 Percussive Organ
194 0 24 17 70’s Percussive Organ
195 0 32 17 Detuned Percussive Organ
196 0 33 17 Light Organ
197 0 37 17 Percussive Organ 2
198 0 0 18 Rock Organ
199 0 64 18 Rotary Organ
200 0 65 18 Slow Rotary
201 0 66 18 Fast Rotary
202 0 0 19 Church Organ
203 0 32 19 Church Organ 3
204 0 35 19 Church Organ 2
205 0 40 19 Notre Dame
206 0 64 19 Organ Flute
207 0 65 19 Tremolo Organ Flute
208 0 0 20 Reed Organ
209 0 40 20 Puff Organ
210 0 0 21 Accordion
211 0 32 21 Accord It
212 0 0 22 Hamonica
213 0 32 22 Harmonica 2
214 0 0 23 Tango Accordion
215 0 64 23 Tango Accordion 2
GUITAR
216 0 0 24 Nylon Guitar
217 0 16 24 Nylon Guitar 2
218 0 25 24 Nylon Guitar 3
219 0 43 24 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
220 0 96 24 Ukulele
221 0 0 25 Steel Guitar
222 0 16 25 Steel Guitar 2
223 0 35 25 12-string Guitar
224 0 40 25 Nylon & Steel Guitar
225 0 41 25
Steel Guitar with Body
Sound
226 0 96 25 Mandolin
227 0 0 26 Jazz Guitar
228 0 18 26 Mellow Guitar
229 0 32 26 Jazz Amp
230 0 0 27 Clean Guitar
231 0 32 27 Chorus Guitar
232 0 0 28 Muted Guitar
233 0 40 28 Funk Guitar 1
234 0 41 28 Muted Steel Guitar
235 0 43 28 Funk Guitar 2
236 0 45 28 Jazz Man
237 0 0 29 Overdriven Guitar
238 0 43 29 Guitar Pinch
239 0 0 30 Distortion Guitar
240 0 40 30 Feedback Guitar
241 0 41 30 Feedback Guitar 2
242 0 0 31 Guitar Harmonics
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
243 0 65 31 Guitar Feedback
244 0 66 31 Guitar Harmonics 2
BASS
245 0 0 32 Acoustic Bass
246 0 40 32 Jazz Rhythm
247 0 45 32
Velocity Crossfade Upright
Bass
248 0 0 33 Finger Bass
249 0 18 33 Finger Dark
250 0 27 33 Flange Bass
251 0 40 33
Bass & Distorted Electric
Guitar
252 0 43 33 Finger Slap Bass
253 0 45 33 Finger Bass 2
254 0 65 33 Modulated Bass
255 0 0 34 Pick Bass
256 0 28 34 Muted Pick Bass
257 0 0 35 Fretless Bass
258 0 32 35 Fretless Bass 2
259 0 33 35 Fretless Bass 3
260 0 34 35 Fretless Bass 4
261 0 96 35 Synth Fretless
262 0 97 35 Smooth Fretless
263 0 0 36 Slap Bass 1
264 0 27 36 Resonant Slap
265 0 32 36 Punch Thumb Bass
266 0 0 37 Slap Bass 2
267 0 43 37 Velocity Switch Slap
268 0 0 38 Synth Bass 1
269 0 18 38 Synth Bass 1 Dark
270 0 20 38 Fast Resonant Bass
271 0 24 38 Acid Bass
272 0 35 38 Clavi Bass
273 0 40 38 Techno Synth Bass
274 0 64 38 Orbiter
275 0 65 38 Square Bass
276 0 66 38 Rubber Bass
277 0 96 38 Hammer
278 0 0 39 Synth Bass 2
279 0 6 39 Mellow Synth Bass
280 0 12 39 Sequenced Bass
281 0 18 39 Click Synth Bass
282 0 19 39 Synth Bass 2 Dark
283 0 32 39 Smooth Synth Bass
284 0 40 39 Modular Synth Bass
285 0 41 39 DX Bass
286 0 64 39 X Wire Bass
STRING
287 0 0 40 Violin
288 0 8 40 Slow Violin
289 0 0 41 Viola
290 0 0 42 Cello
291 0 0 43 Contrabass
292 0 0 44 Tremolo Strings
293 0 8 44 Slow Tremolo Strings
294 0 40 44 Suspense Strings
295 0 0 45 Pizzicato Strings
296 0 0 46 Orchestral Harp
297 0 40 46 Yang Chin
298 0 0 47 Timpani
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
Voice List
82
ENSEMBLE
299 0 0 48 Strings 1
300 0 3 48 Stereo Strings
301 0 8 48 Slow Strings
302 0 24 48 Arco Strings
303 0 35 48 60’s Strings
304 0 40 48 Orchestra
305 0 41 48 Orchestra 2
306 0 42 48 Tremolo Orchestra
307 0 45 48 Velocity Strings
308 0 0 49 Strings 2
309 0 3 49 Stereo Slow Strings
310 0 8 49 Legato Strings
311 0 40 49 Warm Strings
312 0 41 49 Kingdom
313 0 64 49 70’s Strings
314 0 65 49 String Ensemble 3
315 0 0 50 Synth Strings 1
316 0 27 50 Resonant Strings
317 0 64 50 Synth Strings 4
318 0 65 50 Synth Strings 5
319 0 0 51 Synth Strings 2
320 0 0 52 Choir Aahs
321 0 3 52 Stereo Choir
322 0 16 52 Choir Aahs 2
323 0 32 52 Mellow Choir
324 0 40 52 Choir Strings
325 0 0 53 Voice Oohs
326 0 0 54 Synth Voice
327 0 40 54 Synth Voice 2
328 0 41 54 Choral
329 0 64 54 Analog Voice
330 0 0 55 Orchestra Hit
331 0 35 55 Orchestra Hit 2
332 0 64 55 Impact
BRASS
333 0 0 56 Trumpet
334 0 16 56 Trumpet 2
335 0 17 56 Bright Trumpet
336 0 32 56 Warm Trumpet
337 0 0 57 Trombone
338 0 18 57 Trombone 2
339 0 0 58 Tuba
340 0 16 58 Tuba 2
341 0 0 59 Muted Trumpet
342 0 0 60 French Horn
343 0 6 60 French Horn Solo
344 0 32 60 French Horn 2
345 0 37 60 Horn Orchestra
346 0 0 61 Brass Section
347 0 35 61
Trumpet & Trombone
Section
348 0 40 61 Brass Section 2
349 0 41 61 High Brass
350 0 42 61 Mellow Brass
351 0 0 62 Synth Brass 1
352 0 12 62 Quack Brass
353 0 20 62 Resonant Synth Brass
354 0 24 62 Poly Brass
355 0 27 62 Synth Brass 3
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
356 0 32 62 Jump Brass
357 0 45 62 Analog Velocity Brass 1
358 0 64 62 Analog Brass 1
359 0 0 63 Synth Brass 2
360 0 18 63 Soft Brass
361 0 40 63 Synth Brass 4
362 0 41 63 Choir Brass
363 0 45 63 Analog Velocity Brass 2
364 0 64 63 Analog Brass 2
REED
365 0 0 64 Soprano Sax
366 0 0 65 Alto Sax
367 0 40 65 Sax Section
368 0 43 65 Hyper Alto Sax
369 0 0 66 Tenor Sax
370 0 40 66 Breathy Tenor Sax
371 0 41 66 Soft Tenor Sax
372 0 64 66 Tenor Sax 2
373 0 0 67 Baritone Sax
374 0 0 68 Oboe
375 0 0 69 English Horn
376 0 0 70 Bassoon
377 0 0 71 Clarinet
PIPE
378 0 0 72 Piccolo
379 0 0 73 Flute
380 0 0 74 Recorder
381 0 0 75 Pan Flute
382 0 0 76 Blown Bottle
383 0 0 77 Shakuhachi
384 0 0 78 Whistle
385 0 0 79 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
386 0 0 80 Square Lead
387 0 6 80 Square Lead 2
388 0 8 80 LM Square
389 0 18 80 Hollow
390 0 19 80 Shroud
391 0 64 80 Mellow
392 0 65 80 Solo Sine
393 0 66 80 Sine Lead
394 0 0 81 Sawtooth Lead
395 0 6 81 Sawtooth Lead 2
396 0 8 81 Thick Sawtooth
397 0 18 81 Dynamic Sawtooth
398 0 19 81 Digital Sawtooth
399 0 20 81 Big Lead
400 0 24 81 Heavy Synth
401 0 25 81 Waspy Synth
402 0 40 81 Pulse Sawtooth
403 0 41 81 Dr. Lead
404 0 45 81 Velocity Lead
405 0 96 81 Sequenced Analog
406 0 0 82 Calliope Lead
407 0 65 82 Pure Pad
408 0 0 83 Chiff Lead
409 0 64 83 Rubby
410 0 0 84 Charang Lead
411 0 64 84 Distorted Lead
412 0 65 84 Wire Lead
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
Voice List
83
413 0 0 85 Voice Lead
414 0 24 85 Synth Aahs
415 0 64 85 Vox Lead
416 0 0 86 Fifths Lead
417 0 35 86 Big Five
418 0 0 87 Bass & Lead
419 0 16 87 Big & Low
420 0 64 87 Fat & Perky
421 0 65 87 Soft Whirl
SYNTH PAD
422 0 0 88 New Age Pad
423 0 64 88 Fantasy
424 0 0 89 Warm Pad
425 0 16 89 Thick Pad
426 0 17 89 Soft Pad
427 0 18 89 Sine Pad
428 0 64 89 Horn Pad
429 0 65 89 Rotary Strings
430 0 0 90 Poly Synth Pad
431 0 64 90 Poly Pad 80
432 0 65 90 Click Pad
433 0 66 90 Analog Pad
434 0 67 90 Square Pad
435 0 0 91 Choir Pad
436 0 64 91 Heaven
437 0 66 91 Itopia
438 0 67 91 CC Pad
439 0 0 92 Bowed Pad
440 0 64 92 Glacier
441 0 65 92 Glass Pad
442 0 0 93 Metallic Pad
443 0 64 93 Tine Pad
444 0 65 93 Pan Pad
445 0 0 94 Halo Pad
446 0 0 95 Sweep Pad
447 0 20 95 Shwimmer
448 0 27 95 Converge
449 0 64 95 Polar Pad
450 0 66 95 Celestial
SYNTH EFFECTS
451 0 0 96 Rain
452 0 45 96 Clavi Pad
453 0 64 96 Harmo Rain
454 0 65 96 African Wind
455 0 66 96 Carib
456 0 0 97 Sound Track
457 0 27 97 Prologue
458 0 64 97 Ancestral
459 0 0 98 Crystal
460 0 12 98 Synth Drum Comp
461 0 14 98 Popcorn
462 0 18 98 Tiny Bells
463 0 35 98 Round Glockenspiel
464 0 40 98 Glockenspiel Chimes
465 0 41 98 Clear Bells
466 0 42 98 Chorus Bells
467 0 64 98 Synth Mallet
468 0 65 98 Soft Crystal
469 0 66 98 Loud Glockenspiel
470 0 67 98 Christmas Bells
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
471 0 68 98 Vibraphone Bells
472 0 69 98 Digital Bells
473 0 70 98 Air Bells
474 0 71 98 Bell Harp
475 0 72 98 Gamelimba
476 0 0 99 Atmosphere
477 0 18 99 Warm Atmosphere
478 0 19 99 Hollow Release
479 0 40 99 Nylon Electric Piano
480 0 64 99 Nylon Harp
481 0 65 99 Harp Vox
482 0 66 99 Atmosphere Pad
483 0 67 99 Planet
484 0 0 100 Brightness
485 0 64 100 Fantasy Bells
486 0 96 100 Smokey
487 0 0 101 Goblins
488 0 64 101 Goblins Synth
489 0 65 101 Creeper
490 0 66 101 Ring Pad
491 0 67 101 Ritual
492 0 68 101 To Heaven
493 0 70 101 Night
494 0 71 101 Glisten
495 0 96 101 Bell Choir
496 0 0 102 Echoes
497 0 8 102 Echoes 2
498 0 14 102 Echo Pan
499 0 64 102 Echo Bells
500 0 65 102 Big Pan
501 0 66 102 Synth Piano
502 0 67 102 Creation
503 0 68 102 Star Dust
504 0 69 102 Resonant & Panning
505 0 0 103 Sci-Fi
506 0 64 103 Starz
WORLD
507 0 0 104 Sitar
508 0 32 104 Detuned Sitar
509 0 35 104 Sitar 2
510 0 96 104 Tambra
511 0 97 104 Tamboura
512 0 0 105 Banjo
513 0 28 105 Muted Banjo
514 0 96 105 Rabab
515 0 97 105 Gopichant
516 0 98 105 Oud
517 0 0 106 Shamisen
518 0 0 107 Koto
519 0 96 107 Taisho-kin
520 0 97 107 Kanoon
521 0 0 108 Kalimba
522 0 0 109 Bagpipe
523 0 0 110 Fiddle
524 0 0 111 Shanai
525 0 64 111 Shanai 2
526 0 96 111 Pungi
527 0 97 111 Hichiriki
PERCUSSIVE
528 0 0 112 Tinkle Bell
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
Voice List
84
DJ Voice List
529 0 96 112 Bonang
530 0 97 112 Altair
531 0 98 112 Gamelan Gongs
532 0 99 112 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
533 0 100 112 Rama Cymbal
534 0 101 112 Asian Bells
535 0 0 113 Agogo
536 0 0 114 Steel Drums
537 0 97 114 Glass Percussion
538 0 98 114 Thai Bells
539 0 0 115 Woodblock
540 0 96 115 Castanets
541 0 0 116 Taiko Drum
542 0 96 116 Gran Cassa
543 0 0 117 Melodic Tom
544 0 64 117 Melodic Tom 2
545 0 65 117 Real Tom
546 0 66 117 Rock Tom
547 0 0 118 Synth Drum
548 0 64 118 Analog Tom
549 0 65 118 Electronic Percussion
550 0 0 119 Reverse Cymbal
SOUND EFFECTS
551 0 0 120 Fret Noise
552 0 0 121 Breath Noise
553 0 0 122 Seashore
554 0 0 123 Bird Tweet
555 0 0 124 Telephone Ring
556 0 0 125 Helicopter
557 0 0 126 Applause
558 0 0 127 Gunshot
559 64 0 0 Cutting Noise
560 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 2
561 64 0 3 String Slap
562 64 0 16 Flute Key Click
563 64 0 32 Shower
564 64 0 33 Thunder
565 64 0 34 Wind
566 64 0 35 Stream
567 64 0 36 Bubble
568 64 0 37 Feed
569 64 0 48 Dog
570 64 0 49 Horse
571 64 0 50 Bird Tweet 2
572 64 0 54 Ghost
573 64 0 55 Maou
574 64 0 64 Phone Call
575 64 0 65 Door Squeak
576 64 0 66 Door Slam
577 64 0 67 Scratch Cut
578 64 0 68 Scratch Split
579 64 0 69 Wind Chime
580 64 0 70 Telephone Ring 2
581 64 0 80 Car Engine Ignition
582 64 0 81 Car Tires Squeal
583 64 0 82 Car Passing
584 64 0 83 Car Crash
585 64 0 84 Siren
586 64 0 85 Train
587 64 0 86 Jet Plane
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
588 64 0 87 Starship
589 64 0 88 Burst
590 64 0 89 Roller Coaster
591 64 0 90 Submarine
592 64 0 96 Laugh
593 64 0 97 Scream
594 64 0 98 Punch
595 64 0 99 Heartbeat
596 64 0 100 Footsteps
597 64 0 112 Machine Gun
598 64 0 113 Laser Gun
599 64 0 114 Explosion
600 64 0 115 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
DJ
601 0 123 118 DJ Set 1
602 0 123 119 DJ Set 2
603 0 123 120 DJ Set 3
604 0 123 121 DJ Set 4
605 0 123 122 DJ Set 5
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
Voice Name
MSB LSB
Voice List
85
DJ Voice List
Voice No. 601 602 603 604 605
MSB/LSB/PC 000/123/118 000/123/119 000/123/120 000/123/121 000/123/122
No. Note DJ Set 1 DJ Set 2 DJ Set 3 DJ Set 4 DJ Set 5
036 C 1 BD Analog H Bass Drum Soft BD Analog H BD Analog H BD Analog H
037 C# 1 Analog Side Stick Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick
038 D 1 Analog Snare 1 Snare M Analog Snare 1 Analog Snare 1 Analog Snare 1
039 D# 1 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap
040 E 1 Analog Snare 2 Snare H Hard Analog Snare 2 Analog Snare 2 Analog Snare 2
041 F 1 Analog Tom 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1
042 F# 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog HH Closed 1
043 G 1 Analog Tom 2 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2
044 G# 1 Analog HH Closed 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog HH Closed 2
045 A 1 Analog Tom 3 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3
046 A# 1 Analog HH Open Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open Analog HH Open Analog HH Open
047 B 1 Analog Tom 4 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4
048 C 2 Analog Tom 5 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5
049 C# 2 Analog Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal
050 D 2 Analog Tom 6 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6
051 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
052 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
053 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
054 F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
055 G 2
Ohh2 FX01 ORCH signal Go
056 G# 2
057 A 2
058 A# 2
059 B 2
060 C 3
061 C# 3
062 D 3
063 D# 3
064 E 3
065 F 3
066 F# 3
067 G 3
068 G# 3
069 A 3
070 A# 3
071 B 3
072 C 4
FX02 Onemoretime Onemoretime Uhh-Hit Huea
073 C# 4
074 D 4
075 D# 4
076 E 4
077 F 4
078 F# 4
079 G 4
080 G# 4
081 A 4
082 A# 4
083 B 4
084 C 5 Joo Go GetUp Huihu GetUp
085 C# 5 Reverse Ohh2 signal Joo Reverse
086 D 5 Huihu Heau Joo ComeOn Joo
087 D# 5 FXTBrs FX02 FXTBrs Onemoretime FX01
088 E 5 Huea Huihu Go Go Ohh1
089 F 5 GetUp GetUp Huihu GetUp Ohh2
090 F# 5 Ohh1 Reverse FX01 Huea Onemoretime
091 G 5 Go signal ComeOn Ohh2 ComeOn
092 G# 5 Scratch 1 Scratch 1 Scratch 1 Scratch 1 Scratch 1
093 A 5 Scratch 2 Scratch 2 Scratch 2 Scratch 2 Scratch 2
094 A# 5 Scratch 3 Scratch 3 Scratch 3 Scratch 3 Scratch 3
095 B 5 Scratch 4 Scratch 4 Scratch 4 Scratch 4 Scratch 4
096 C 6 Scratch 5 Scratch 5 Scratch 5 Scratch 5 Scratch 5
86
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8Beat
001 8BeatModern
002 60’sGtrPop
003 8BeatAdria
004 60’s8Beat
005 8Beat
006 OffBeat
007 60’sRock
008 HardRock
009 RockShuffle
010 8BeatRock
16Beat
011 16Beat
012 PopShuffle1
013 PopShuffle2
014 GuitarPop
015 16BtUptempo
016 KoolShuffle
017 JazzRock
018 HipHopLight
Ballad
019 PianoBallad
020 LoveSong
021 6/8ModernEP
022 6/8SlowRock
023 OrganBallad
024 PopBallad
025 16BeatBallad1
026 16BeatBallad2
Dance
027 EuroTrance
028 Ibiza
029 HouseMusik
030 SwingHouse
031 TechnoPolis
032 Clubdance
033 ClubLatin
034 Garage1
035 Garage2
036 TechnoParty
037 UKPop
038 HipHopGroove
039 HipShuffle
040 HipHopPop
Disco
041 70’sDisco1
042 70’sDisco2
043 LatinDisco
044 DiscoPhilly
045 SaturdayNight
046 DiscoChocolate
047 DiscoHands
Swing&Jazz
048 BigBandFast
049 BigBandMid
050 BigBandBallad
051 BigBandShfl
052 JazzClub
053 Swing1
054 Swing2
055 Five/Four
056 JazzBallad
057 Dixieland
058 Ragtime
059 AfroCuban
060 Charleston
R&B
061 Soul
062 DetroitPop1
063 60’sRock&Roll
064 6/8Soul
065 CrocoTwist
066 Rock&Roll
067 DetroitPop2
068 BoogieWoogie
069 ComboBoogie
070 6/8Blues
Country
071 Country8Beat
072 CountryPop
073 CountrySwing
074 Country2/4
075 CowboyBoogie
076 CountryShuffle
077 Bluegrass
Latin
078 BrazilianSamba
079 BossaNova
080 PopBossa
081 Tijuana
082 DiscoLatin
083 Mambo
084 Salsa
085 Beguine
086 GypsyRumba
087 RmbFlamenca
088 RumbaIsland
089 Reggae
Ballroom
090 VienneseWaltz
091 EnglishWaltz
092 Slowfox
093 Foxtrot
094 Quickstep
Style No. Style Name
095 Tango
096 Pasodoble
097 Samba
098 ChaChaCha
099 Rumba
100 Jive
Traditional
101 USMarch
102 6/8March
103 GermanMarch
104 PolkaPop
105 OberPolka
106 Tarantella
107 Showtune
108 ChristmasSwing
109 ChristmasWaltz
110 ScottishReel
111 Hawaiian
Waltz
112 GuitarSerenade
113 SwingWaltz
114 JazzWaltz1
115 JazzWaltz2
116 CountryWaltz
117 OberWalzer
118 Musette
DJ
119 DJ-HipHop
120 DJ-DanceSwing
121 DJ-House
122 DJ-GarageHouse
123 DJ-PopR&B
Pianist
124 Stride
125 PianoSwing
126 PianoRag
127 Arpeggio
128 Musical
129 Habanera
130 SlowRock
131 8BeatPianoBallad
132 PianoMarch
133 6/8PianoMarch
134 PianoWaltz
135 PianoBeguine
Style No. Style Name
87
Music Database List
M.D.B. No. M.D.B. Name
POP HITS
001 AlvFever
002 Croco Rk
003 DayPdise
004 EasySday
005 GoMyWay
006 HowDeep!
007 HurryLuv
008 I’m Torn
009 Imagine
010 ISurvive
011 JustCall
012 JustWay
013 NikitTrp
014 ProudGtr
015 SailngSx
016 Sept.Pop
017 SultanSw
018 SweetLrd
019 ThnkMsic
020 TitanicH
021 WatchGrl
022 WhatALoo
023 WhitePle
024 YestDGtr
SWING & JAZZ
025 Alex Rag
026 Blue Set
027 DayOfW&R
028 HighMoon
029 MistySax
030 MoonLit
031 New York
032 PanthrSw
033 PatrolBr
034 PatrolSx
035 PetiteCl
036 RedRoses
037 SaintMch
038 SatinWd
039 SaxMood
040 SF Heart
041 ShearJz
042 Showbiz
043 SplnkyTb
044 SunnySde
045 TstHoney
046 TwoFoot5
047 WhatsNew
048 Wild Cat
049 WondrLnd
EASY LISTENING
050 BlackFst
051 CaliBlue
052 CiaoCpri
053 Close2U
054 DAmorStr
055 DolanesM
056 ElCondor
057 Entrtain
058 Frippers
059 LuckySax
060 LuvStory
061 MyPrince
062 OSoleMio
063 PalomaGt
064 PuppetBr
065 Raindrop
066 RedMouln
067 R’ticGtr
068 Schiwago
069 ShadowGt
070 SingRain
071 SmallWld
072 SpkSoft
073 SpnishEy
074 StrangeN
075 TieRibbn
076 TimeGoes
077 WhteXmas
078 WishStar
079 WondrWld
ROMANTIC BALLADS
080 AdelineB
081 ArgenCry
082 BeautBdy
083 Bl Bayou
084 CatMemry
085 CavaSolo
086 E Weiss
087 ElvGhett
088 Feeling
089 Fly Away
090 Fnl Date
091 GreenSlv
092 GtCncert
093 HrdToSay
094 LonlyPan
095 MBoxDnce
096 Mn Rivr
097 Norw.Flt
098 OnMyMnd
099 OverRbow
100 Red Lady
101 ReleseMe
102 SavingLv
103 Shore Cl
104 SierraMd
105 SilverMn
106 SmokyEye
107 SndOfSil
108 TblWater
109 WhisprSx
ROCK & FUSION
110 DavAgain
111 JumpRock
112 OyComCha
113 PickUpPc
114 RdRiverR
115 SatsfyGt
116 Sheriff
117 SmokeWtr
118 TwistAgn
119 VenusPop
RHYTHM & BLUES
120 AmazingG
121 BoogiePf
122 Clock Rk
123 CU later
124 HappyDay
125 JohnnyB
126 MercyBrs
127 RisingSn
128 S Preems
129 SuperStv
130 Yeh Orgn
HIP HOP HOUSE
131 2 of US
132 B Leave
133 Back St
134 FunkyTwn
135 KillSoft
136 MiamiTrn
137 Nine PM
138 SharpRap
139 SingBack
140 StrandD
M.D.B. No. M.D.B. Name
LATIN NIGHTS
141 BambaBrs
142 BambaFlt
143 BeHappy!
144 CopaLola
145 DayNight
146 Ipanema
147 MarinaAc
148 MuchoTrb
149 SmoothLt
150 SunOfLif
151 Sunshine
152 Tico Org
153 TrbWave
COUNTRY & WESTERN
154 BlownWnd
155 Bonanza
156 BoxerGtr
157 CntryRds
158 GreenGrs
159 Jambala
160 LondonSt
161 LooseEL
162 TopWorld
163 YlwRose
DISCO & PARTY
164 AlhHwaii
165 Babylon
166 Barbados
167 BirdySyn
168 FestaMex
169 HandsPty
170 LuvTheme
171 ModrnTlk
172 NxtAlice
173 PalomaFl
174 PubPiano
175 Tijuana
176 Why MCA?
BALLROOM
177 BrazilBr
178 CherryBr
179 CherryOr
180 DanubeWv
181 MantoStr
182 SandmnFx
183 SundyNvr
184 TangoPiz
185 Tea4Two
186 TulipWtz
187 YesSirQk
TRADITIONAL
188 AlpenTri
189 Balalaik
190 Ceilidh
191 CielPari
192 Cl Polka
193 Comrades
194 Funiculi
195 HappyPlk
196 Herzlin
197 HornPipe
198 JinglBel
199 Kufstein
200 MexiHat
201 MickyFlt
202 NavyAway
203 RlBarrel
204 SnowWtz
205 StarMrch
206 WashPost
207 WdCuttrs
208 XmasWalz
M.D.B. No. M.D.B. Name
88
Drum Kit List
” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
Each percussion voice uses one note.
The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard
Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”
(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played
simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each
other.)
Voice No. 109 110 111 112 113 114
MSB/LSB/PC 127/000/000 127/000/001 127/000/008 127/000/016 127/000/024 127/000/025
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note# Note
Note#
Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Snare L SD Rock H
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Analog L
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2 BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Analog Snare 1
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1
54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Analog Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull
92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
89
Voice No. 109 115 116 117 118 119 120
MSB/LSB/PC 127/000/000 127/000/027 127/000/032 127/000/040 127/000/048 126/000/000 126/000/001
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft AnBD Dance-1 Bass Drum L
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot AnSD OpenRim
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard AnBD Dance-2 Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M Door Slam
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Sn H Scratch
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Wind Chime
54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 3 Telephone Ring 2
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Hand Cym. L
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cym.Short L
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell
Siren
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Hand Cym. H Train
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Short H Starship
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
Burst
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Roller Coaster
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H
Submarine
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas
Wind Punch
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
Bubble FootSteps
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Analog Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull
92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun
97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun
98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion
99 D# 687D# 5 Firework
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5 Ghost
103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
90
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA [ Portable Keyboard ] Date:25-Jan-2002
Model PSR-292 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Function...
Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16 *1
Channel Changed x x
Default 3 3
Mode Messages x x
Altered ************** x
Note 0 - 127 0 - 127
Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127
Note OFF o 9nH,v=0 o 9nH,v=0 or 8nH
After Key's x x
Touch Ch's x x
Pitch Bend x o
Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127
Change : True # **************
System Exclusive o *3 o *3
: Song Pos. x x
Common : Song Sel. x x
: Tune x x
System : Clock o o
Real Time: Commands o *4 o *4
Aux :All Sound OFF o o(120,126,127)
:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)
:Local ON/OFF x o(122) *5
:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)
Mes- :Active Sense o o
sages:Reset x x
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No
0,32 o o Bank Select
1 x *2 o Modulation wheel
6 x o Data Entry(MSB)
38 x o Data Entry(LSB)
7o o Part Volume
10 o o Pan
Control 11 x *2 o Expression
64 o o Sustain
Change 71 x *2 o Harmonic Content
72 x *2 o Release Time
73 x *2 o Attack Time
74 x *2 o Brightness
84 x *2 o Portamento Cntrl
91,93,94 o o Effect Depth
96,97 x o RPN Inc,Dec
100,101 x *2 o RPN LSB,MSB
MIDI Implementation Chart
91
NOTE:
*1 By default (factory settings) the PSR-292 ordinarily functions as a 16-channel
multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel
voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect
the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.
MIDI Master Tuning
System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type, Chorus Type,
and DSP Type.
*2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the
PSR-292 itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompa-
niment, song or using the Harmony effect.
*3 Exclusive
<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H
This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument,
with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.
<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H
This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simulta-
neously (Universal System Exclusive).
The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Tuning. (Values for “ll” are
ignored.)
<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H
This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels.
The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.
The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any val-
ues can be used for “n” and “cc.
<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H
mm : Reverb Type MSB
ll : Reverb Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details.
<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H
mm : Chorus Type MSB
ll : Chorus Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details.
<DSP Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH, F7H
mm : DSP Type MSB
ll : DSP Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details.
<DRY Level> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 08H, 0mH, 11H, llH, F7H
ll : Dry Level
0m : Channel Number
<XG Parametter Change> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, hh, mm, ll, dd, F7H
hh mm ll : address
dd : data
<XG Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 0nH, 4CH, aa, bb, hh, mm, ll, dd, cc, F7H
0n : Device Number n=0 (send), 0 - f (receive)
aa bb : Byte Count (aa << 7) + bb
hh mm ll : address
dd : data
<Sequence Recording Bulk Dump>
F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 0AH, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H
mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH
06H : Bulk ID
0AH : Bulk No.
aa : Byte Count MSB
bb : Byte Count LSB
cc : amount of valid MSB data
dd : amount of valid LSB data
hh mm ll : address
bulk data : Sequence data (1byte, 2byte...7byte, MSB data)
sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data)
<One Touch Setting Bulk Dump>
F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 09H, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H
mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH
06H : Bulk ID
09H : Bulk No.
aa : Byte Count MSB
bb : Byte Count LSB
cc : amount of valid MSB data
dd : amount of valid LSB data
hh mm ll : address
bulk data : Sequence data (low 4bit, high 4 bit...low 4bit, high 4 bit)
sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data)
*4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When
accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted.When the clock is
set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment
stop) are recognized.
*5 Local ON/OFF
<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F
<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00
Value for “n” is ignored.
MIDI Implementation Chart
92
Effect map
* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the
LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.
* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond
to the number indicated in the display..
* By using an external sequencer, which is capable of editing and transmitting
the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, you can select the
Reverb, Chorus and DSP effect types which are not accessible from the
PSR-292 panel itself. When one of the effects is selected by the external se-
quencer, “ - ” will be shown on the display.
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000 No Effect
001 (1)Hall1 (2)Hall2
002 Room (3)Room1 (4)Room2
003 Stage (5)Stage1 (6)Stage2
004 Plate (7)Plate1 (8)Plate2
005...127 No Effect
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000...064 No Effect
065 Chorus Chorus2
066 Celeste Chorus1
067 Flanger Flanger1 Flanger2
068...127 No Effect
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000 No Effect
001 (1)Hall1 (2)Hall2
002 Room (3)Room1 (4)Room2
003 Stage (5)Stage1 (6)Stage2
004 Plate (7)Plate1 (8)Plate2
005 Delay L,C,R (26)Delay L,C,R
006 (27)Delay L,R
007 (28)Echo
008 (29)Cross Delay
009
(9)Early Reflection1 (10)Early Reflection2
010 (11)Gate Reverb
011 (12)Reverse Gate
012...019 No Effect
020 (30)Karaoke
021...064 No Effect
065 Chorus (14)Chorus2
066 Celeste (13)Chorus1
067 Flanger
(15)Flanger1
(16)Flanger2
068 Symphonic (17)Symphonic
069 Rotary Speaker
(19)Rotary Speaker1
070 Tremolo (21)Tremolo1
071 Auto Pan (24)Auto Pan
(20)Rotary Speaker2
(22)Tremolo2
(23)Guitar Tremolo
072 (18)Phaser
073 Distortion
074 (33)Overdrive
075
(34)Amp Simulation
(31)Distortion Hard
(32)Distortion Soft
076 (36)3Band EQ
(35)EQ Telephone
077 (37)2Band EQ
078 Auto Wah (25)Auto Wah
079...127 No Effect
Effect map
93
Specifications
Keyboards
61 standard-size keys (C1 - C6), with Touch Response.
Display
Large multi-function LCD display (backlit)
Setup
STANDBY/ON
MASTER VOLUME : MIN - MAX
Panel Controls
SONG, VOICE, STYLE, M.D.B., DICTIONARY, DJ, PC,
LESSON L, R, METRONOME, PORTABLE GRAND,
DEMO, FUNCTION(TRANSPOSE), TOUCH, HARMONY,
DUAL, SPLIT, TEMPO/TAP, ONE TOUCH SETTING, [0]-
[9], [+](YES), [-](NO), CATEGORY, SELECT, Dial
Voice
108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 480 XG voices +
5 DJ voices
Polyphony : 32
DUAL
SPLIT
Style
135 styles
Style Control : ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC
START, START/STOP, INTRO ENDING,
MAIN/AUTO FILL
Fingering : Multi fingering
Style Volume
Music Database
208
Yamaha Educational Suite
Dictionary
Lesson 1-4
One Touch Setting
Preset A and B (for each style)
Memory
Function
Transpose, Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Main
Voice – Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus
Send Level; DSP Send Level, Dual Voice – Voice; Volume;
Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP
Send Level, Split Voice – Voice; Volume; Octave; Pan; Re-
verb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Re-
verb Type, Chorus Type, DSP Type, Harmony Type,
Harmony Volume, Local On/Off, External Clock, Bulk Data
Send, Initial Setup Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song
Out, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume,
Time Signature, Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade
On/Off, Demo and DJ Cancel
Effects
Reverb : 8 types
Chorus : 4 types
DSP : 38 types
Harmony : 26 types
Song
100 Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory
Song Clear, Track Clear
Song Volume
Recording
Song
User Song : 5 Songs
Recording Tracks : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE
MIDI
Local On/Off • Initial Setup Send • External Clock
Bulk Data Send • Keyboard Out • Style Out
Song Out
Auxiliary jacks
PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT,
SUSTAIN
Amplier
3.0W + 3.0W
Speakers
12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2
Power Consumption (when using PA-3C power adaptor)
UL/CSA :14W
CE :15W
Power Supply
Adaptor : Yamaha PA-3C AC power adaptor
Batteries : Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent
batteries
Dimensions (W x D x H)
952 x 389 x 140 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/3" x 5-1/2")
Weight
6.8 kg (15 lbs.)
Supplied Accessories
Music Stand
Owner’s Manual
Song Book
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for
information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right
to change or modify products or specifications at any time
without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or op-
tions may not be the same in every locale, please check with
your Yamaha dealer.
Optional Accessories
Headphones : HPE-150
AC power adaptor : PA-3B/3C
Footswitch : FC4, FC5
Keyboard stand : L-2C
94
Panel controls and terminals
+/- ............................................... 9, 24
A-B REPEAT.............................. 9, 53
ACMP ......................................... 9
, 36
CATEGORY ............................... 8, 23
DC IN 12V ................................. 9, 10
DEMO ........................................ 8, 14
Dial ............................................. 8, 24
DICTIONARY............................ 8, 45
DJ................................................ 8, 22
DUAL ......................................... 8, 26
FF................................................ 9, 53
FUNCTION................................ 8, 74
HARMONY ............................... 8
, 31
INTRO ENDING........................ 9, 36
LEFT................................................53
LESSON ..................................... 8, 62
M.D.B. ........................................ 8, 48
MAIN/AUTO FILL .................... 9, 36
MASTER VOLUME .........................8
MEMORY .................................. 9, 29
METRONOME .......................... 8, 20
MIDI IN...................................... 9, 67
MIDI OUT.................................. 9, 67
NO ........................................9, 59, 60
Numeric keypad.......................... 9, 24
ONE TOUCH SETTING............ 9, 28
PAUSE ........................................ 9, 53
PC ............................................... 8, 73
PHONES/OUTPUT.................... 9, 11
PORTABLE GRAND................. 8, 20
REC .................................................57
RECORD...........................................9
REW ........................................... 9, 53
RIGHT.............................................53
SELECT ..................................... 8, 24
SONG .............................8, 51, 57, 61
SONG MEMORY ...................... 9
, 57
SPLIT ......................................... 8
, 27
STANDBY/ON........................... 8, 11
START/STOP ....................... 9
, 36, 53
STYLE........................................ 8
, 35
SUSTAIN.................................... 9, 11
SYNC START ............................ 9
, 36
SYNC STOP............................... 9
, 36
TEMPO/TAP ........................ 9, 20, 41
TOUCH ...................................... 8, 30
VOICE ........................................ 8, 23
YES.......................................9, 59, 60
Misc.
#000 OTS ........................................ 26
A
A-B repreat ..................................... 54
AC Power adaptor........................... 10
accessory jacks................................ 11
accompaniment sections ................. 42
Accompaniment Split Point ............ 27
B
Batteries .......................................... 10
Beat display..................................... 51
beat marks ....................................... 51
Bulk................................................. 69
C
Chord Names .................................. 47
Chord Track .................................... 57
Chord Type...................................... 47
Chords, About ................................. 46
Chords, Fingered............................. 43
Chords, Single Finger ..................... 43
Chorus............................................. 32
Clearing, Song ................................ 59
D
DEMO Cancel................................. 14
Demo song ...................................... 14
Dictionary ....................................... 45
DJ .................................................... 22
Drum Kit Voice Chart ..................... 88
DSP ................................................. 32
Dual Voice....................................... 26
E
Effects ............................................. 31
Ending............................................. 36
External Clock ................................ 69
F
Fill-in .............................................. 42
Fingered chords............................... 43
Flash memory ...........................71
, 78
Footswitch....................................... 11
Function .......................................... 74
G
GM System Level 1 ........................ 66
Grade............................................... 65
H
Harmony ......................................... 31
Headphones..................................... 11
I
Indicator .......................................... 18
Initial Setup Send ............................ 69
Initialization .................................... 78
Internal Clock.................................. 69
Intro ................................................. 38
L
Left .................................................. 62
Lesson .............................................61
Lesson Track ................................... 63
Level, chorus send........................... 32
Level, DSP send .............................. 32
Level, reverb send ...........................31
Local on/off ..................................... 69
M
M.D.B. (music database)................. 48
Main A/B......................................... 42
Main Voice....................................... 25
Master Volume................................... 8
Melody Voice Change ..................... 55
Metronome ...................................... 20
MIDI................................................ 66
MIDI channels................................. 67
MIDI Implementation Chart ........... 90
MIDI LSB Receive cancel .............. 70
MIDI terminals................................ 67
Multi Fingering ............................... 43
Music Stand..................................... 19
O
Octave.............................................. 19
Octave, dual..................................... 26
Octave, main.................................... 25
Octave, split..................................... 27
One Touch Setting........................... 28
P
Pan, dual.......................................... 26
Pan, main......................................... 25
Pan, split.......................................... 27
PC.................................................... 73
Portable Grand ................................20
Q
Quick Guide .................................... 12
R
recording, song................................ 56
Reverb ............................................. 31
Right................................................ 62
Root ................................................. 46
Index
Index
95
S
sections (accompaniment) ...............42
Single Finger chords........................43
Song Clear .......................................59
Song Filer ........................................72
Song Volume....................................55
songs, playing ..................................53
songs, recording...............................56
songs, selecting................................51
Specifications...................................93
Split Point ........................................27
Split Voice........................................27
Style Volume....................................42
styles, playing ..................................36
styles, selecting................................35
Sync Start.........................................37
Sync Stop.........................................40
T
Tap................................................... 37
Tempo .......................................20, 41
Time Signature................................ 21
Touch Sensitivity............................. 30
track (song) ..................................... 57
tracks, muting.................................. 58
Transpose ........................................ 29
Troubleshooting .............................. 77
Tuning ............................................. 29
U
User songs....................................... 56
V
Voice List......................................... 79
voices, Drum Kit ............................. 88
voices, selecting and playing........... 23
voices, XG....................................... 80
Volume, dual.................................... 26
Volume, harmony ............................ 31
Volume, main .................................. 25
Volume, Metronome........................ 21
Volume, Song .................................. 55
Volume, split.................................... 27
Volume, Style .................................. 42
X
XG voices........................................ 80
Limited Warranty
90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS
Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed
below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models
included in the following series of products:
PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect
in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject
to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the
consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as
warranty replacements.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PROD-
UCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY
IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY
EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these
limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for
assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation
of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts
under warranty.
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has
a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and
to follow all safety precautions.
EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to fail-
ures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an
authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia,
and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.
Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________
Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________
(Retailer)
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Electronic Service Division
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!
HEAD OFFICE
Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
[PK] 32
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-3085-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Central Europe,
Branch Nederland
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Belgium
Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,
Belgium
Tel: 02-726 6032
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0660
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
No.11 Ubi Road 1, No.06-02,
Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2002 Yamaha Corporation
V874220 ???PO???.?-01C0 Printed in China
Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)
http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Transcripción de documentos

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. 2 Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: NOTICE: 92-BP (bottom) Warning: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) 1 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C or PA-3B or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Keep batteries away from children. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. (4)-8 1/2 4 2 • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving and backing up your data • Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external media such as the Yamaha MDF3 MIDI data filer. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your instrument. ● Regarding the song (or composition) “Just The Way You Are” included in this keyboard Composition Title : Just The Way You Are Composer’s Name : Billy Joel Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD CAUTION : All Rights Reserved, Unauthorised copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. ● COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. ● Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. (4)-8 2/2 3 5 Congratulations on your purchase of the Yamaha PSR-292 PortaTone! You now own a portable keyboard that combines advanced functions, great sound and exceptional ease-of-use in a highly compact package. Its outstanding features also make it a remarkably expressive and versatile instrument. Read this Owner’s Manual carefully while playing your new PSR-292 in order to take full advantage of its various features. Main Features The PSR-292 is a sophisticated yet easy-to-use keyboard with the following features and functions: ■ Stereo Sampled Piano .......................................................................... page 20 The PSR-292 has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice — created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophiscated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. ■ Touch Response .................................................................................... page 30 The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength — just a like a real musical instrument! ■ Yamaha Education Suite ......................................................... pages 43, 45, 61 The PSR-292 features the new Yamaha Education Suite — a set of learning tools that utilize the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulfilling than ever before! ■ One Touch Setting ................................................................................. page 28 The One Touch Setting feature lets you automatically call up an appropriate voice for playing with the selected style. Each style has memory space for two One Touch Settings, and you can change them to your own desired voice setting — letting you save your custom panel settings for instant recall. ■ Powerful Speaker System The built-in stereo amplifier/speaker system of the PSR-292 — with a special Bass Boost feature — provides exceptionally powerful, high-quality sound, letting you hear the full dynamic range of the PSR-292’s authentic voices. ■ Music Database ..................................................................................... page 48 The PSR-292 has an advanced, easy-to-use Music Database feature that automatically selects the style, voice, and effect settings for playing in a specific type of music. This can be a big help if you know what genre of music you want to play, but you don’t know what settings to make. Just select the genre, and the PSR-292 takes care of the rest! ■ GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. ■ XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. 6 Contents Panel Controls and Terminals ........................ 8 Selecting and Playing Songs ....................... 51 Setting Up....................................................... 10 • Selecting a Song...............................................51 • Playing the Songs.............................................53 • A-B Repeat .......................................................54 • Melody Voice Change.......................................55 • Adjusting the Song Volume ..............................55 • Power Requirements ........................................10 • Turning On the Power.......................................11 • Accessory Jacks ...............................................11 Quick Guide 12 Step 1 Voices ........................................................... 12 Step 2 Songs............................................................ 14 Step 3 Music Database............................................. 16 Song Recording............................................. 56 • Recording a User Song ....................................56 • Song Clear........................................................59 • Track Clear .......................................................60 Song Lesson .................................................. 61 DJ .................................................................... 22 • Using the Lesson Feature.................................61 • Select the Lesson Track ...................................63 • Lesson 1 — Timing...........................................63 • Lesson 2 — Waiting..........................................64 • Lesson 3 — Minus One ....................................64 • Lesson 4 — Both Hands...................................65 • Grade................................................................65 • Playing the DJ...................................................22 MIDI Functions............................................... 66 Playing Voices ............................................... 23 • What Is MIDI? ...................................................66 • Connecting to a Personal Computer.................68 • Local Control.....................................................69 • Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer.......69 • External Clock...................................................69 • Bulk Data Send.................................................69 • Keyboard Out....................................................70 • Style Out ...........................................................70 • Song Out...........................................................70 • Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory 71 • PC Mode...........................................................73 Panel Display Indications ............................. 18 Portable Grand............................................... 20 • Playing the Portable Grand...............................20 • Using the Metronome .......................................20 • Playing a Voice .................................................23 • #000 OTS .........................................................26 • Dual Voice ........................................................26 • Split Voice.........................................................27 • Setting the Split Point .......................................27 • One Touch Setting............................................28 • Transpose and Tuning......................................29 • Touch and Touch Sensitivity.............................30 Effects............................................................. 31 • Harmony ...........................................................31 • Reverb ..............................................................31 • Chorus ..............................................................32 • DSP ..................................................................32 Selecting and Playing Styles ........................ 35 • Selecting a Style ...............................................35 • Playing the Styles .............................................36 • Sync Stop .........................................................40 • Changing the Tempo ........................................41 • Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins). 42 • Adjusting the Style Volume...............................42 • Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering 43 • Dictionary..........................................................45 Using the Music Database ............................ 48 • Data stored by the Music Database..................50 Function ......................................................... 74 • Using the Function parameters.........................74 Troubleshooting ............................................ 77 Data Backup & Initialization ......................... 78 Voice List ....................................................... 79 Style List ........................................................ 86 Music Database List ...................................... 87 Drum Kit List .................................................. 88 MIDI Implementation Chart ........................... 90 Effect map ...................................................... 92 Specifications ................................................ 93 Index ............................................................... 94 7 Panel Controls and Terminals ■ Front Panel u e r t y i o !3 GrandPno 001 !0 !1 !2 !9 !5 !6 !7 !8 092 001 !4 @0 @1 q w @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 q Power switch ([STANDBY/ON]) w [MASTER VOLUME] dial This determines the overall volume of the PSR-292. e [TOUCH] button This turns the Touch function on and off. (See page 30.) r [HARMONY] button This turns the Harmony effect on and off. (See page 31.) @8 @9 !1 [METRONOME] button This turns the metronome on and off. (See page 20.) !2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button This instantly calls up the Grand Piano voice. (See page 12.) !3 [DEMO] button This is used to play the Demo song. (See page 14.) t [DUAL] button This turns the Dual voice on or off. (See page 26.) !4 [FUNCTION] Button This calls up the Function mode and stores the specified panel setting to the flash memory (see pages 74, 78). y [SPLIT] button This turns the Split voice on and off. (See page 27.) !5 [SONG] button This is for enabling song selection. (See page 51.) u [DICTIONARY] button This calls up the Dictionary function (page 45). !6 [STYLE] button This is for enabling style selection. (See page 35.) i [DJ] button This instantly calls up a special DJ voice and style. !7 [VOICE] button This is for enabling voice selection. (See page 23.) Holding down this button calls up the Melody Voice Change function. (See page 55.) r < r f !9 Dial, CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons, SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons This dial is used to select the number of the desired song, voice, style or M.D.B.. (See page 24.) This also used to set the Tempo and Function value. The CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to select f !0 LESSON [L] (Left) and [R] (Right) buttons These call up the Lesson exercises for the corresponding hand (left or right) for the selected song. (See page 62.) !8 [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button This calls up the optimum panel settings for selected music genre. (See page 48.) > o [PC] Button This exceptionally convenient control lets you store and instantly call up the specified MIDI settings for optimum use with a connected computer or other MIDI device. (See page 73.) 8 @7 Panel Controls and Terminals < > the category of songs, voices, styles, M.D.B. or Functions. Pressing the buttons steps through the various categories. The SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to decrease or increase the number of the desired song, voice, style, M.D.B., or specific Function, as well as to adjust certain settings. @0 Numeric keypad, [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons These are used for selecting songs, voices, and styles. (See pages 24.) They are also used for adjusting certain settings and answering certain display prompts. @1 [ACMP] / [A-B REPEAT] button When the Style mode is selected, this turns the auto accompaniment on and off. (See page 36.) In the Song mode, this calls up the A-B Repeat function. (See page 54.) @2 [SYNC STOP] button This turns the Sync Stop function on and off. (See page 40.) @3 [SYNC START] / [PAUSE] button This turns the Sync Start function on and off. (See page 37.) In the Song mode, it is used to temporarily pause song playback. (See page 53.) @4 [INTRO ENDING] / [REW r] button When the Style mode is selected, this is used to control the Intro and Ending functions. (See page 36.) When the Song mode is selected, this is used as a “rewind” control, or move the song playback point back toward the beginning. @5 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] / [FF f] button When the Style mode is selected, these are used to change auto accompaniment sections and control the Auto Fill function. (See page 42.) When the Song mode is selected, this is used as a “fast forward” control, or move the song playback point toward the end. @6 [START/STOP] button When the Style mode is selected, this alternately starts and stops the style. (See page 36.) In the Song mode, this alternately starts and stops song playback. (See page 54.) @7 [TEMPO/TAP] button This button is used to call up the Tempo setting, letting you set the Tempo with the dial, numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons. (See page 20.) It also allows you to tap out the tempo and automatically start a selected song or style at that tapped speed. (See page 37.) @8 ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons These buttons ([MEMORY], [1], [2]) are used to select the One Touch Setting registrations. (See page 28.) @9 SONG MEMORY buttons These buttons ([REC], [1] - [5], [A]) are used for song recording, letting you record up to six different tracks of a song (including a special Chord track). (See page 57.) ■ Rear Panel #0 #1 #0 MIDI IN, OUT terminals These are for connection to other MIDI instruments and devices. (See page 67.) #1 SUSTAIN jack This is for connection to an optional FC4 or FC5 Footswitch for control over sustain, just like the damper pedal on a piano. (See page 11.) #2 #3 #2 PHONES/OUTPUT jack This is for connection to a set of stereo headphones or to an external amplifier/speaker system. (See page 11.) #3 DC IN 12V jack This is for connection to a PA-3C or PA-3B AC power adaptor. (See page 10.) 9 Setting Up This section contains information about setting up your PSR-292 for playing. Make sure to read this section carefully before using the instrument. Power Requirements Although the PSR-292 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. • Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. remove the batteries or unplug the AC adaptor) during any PSR-292 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal flash memory and result in loss of data. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • q Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the PSR-292 is set to STANDBY. w Connect the AC adaptor (PA-3C, PA-3B, or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to the power supply jack. e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. w e • Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-3C or PA-3B AC Power Adaptor (or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to power your instrument from the AC mains. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the PSR-292. • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the PSR-292, or during electrical storms. ■ Using Batteries • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • For battery operation the PSR-292 requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When the batteries need to be replaced, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the batteries, as described below q Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. w Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. 10 • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. • Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. Setting Up Turning On the Power With the AC power adaptor connected or with batteries installed, simply press the power switch until it locks in the ON position. When the instrument is not in use, be sure to turn the power off. (Press the switch again so that it pops up.) • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the PSR-292 for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal flash memory and result in loss of data. Accessory Jacks ■ Using Headphones• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • For private practicing and playing without disturbing others, connect a set of stereo headphones to the rear panel PHONES/OUTPUT jack. Sound from the built-in speaker system is automatically cut off when you insert a headphone plug into this jack. ■ Connecting a Keyboard Amplifier or Stereo System • • • • • • • Though the PSR-292 is equipped with a built-in speaker system, you can also play it through an external amplifier/speaker system. First, make sure the PSR-292 and any external devices are turned off, then connect one end of a stereo audio cable to the LINE IN or AUX IN jack(s) of the other device and the other end to the rear panel PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the PSR-292. Stereo System • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. ■ Using a Footswitch • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This feature lets you use an optional footswitch (Yamaha FC4 or FC5) to sustain the sound of the voices. The footswitch functions the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano — press and hold down the footswitch as you play the keyboard to sustain the sound. • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. ■ Using the MIDI Terminals • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. The PSR-292 also features MIDI terminals, allowing you to interface the PSR-292 with other MIDI instruments and devices. (For more information, see page 67.) MIDI instrument 11 Quick Guide Step 1 Voices w q GrandPno 001 z z 092 001 q r Playing the Piano Simply by pressing the [PORTABLE GRAND] button, you can automatically select the Grand Piano voice. z Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Playing along with the Metronome z Press the [METRONOME] button. GrandPno 001 x Play the keyboard. Want to find out more? See page 20. Want to find out more? See page 20. ● Panel Voice List No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 12 Voice Name PIANO Grand Piano Bright Piano Honky-tonk Piano MIDI Grand Piano CP 80 Harpsichord E.PIANO Galaxy EP Funky Electric Piano DX Modern Elec. Piano Hyper Tines Venus Electric Piano Clavi * This list includes only a portion of the total available voices. No. 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 Voice Name ORGAN Jazz Organ 1 Jazz Organ 2 Click Organ Bright Organ Rock Organ Purple Organ 16'+2' Organ 16'+4' Organ Theater Organ Church Organ Chapel Organ Reed Organ No. 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 Voice Name ACCORDION Traditional Accordion Musette Accordion Bandoneon Harmonica GUITAR Classical Guitar Folk Guitar 12Strings Guitar Jazz Guitar Octave Guitar Clean Guitar 60’s Clean Guitar Muted Guitar Overdriven Guitar No. 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Voice Name Distortion Guitar BASS Acoustic Bass Finger Bass Pick Bass Fretless Bass Slap Bass Synth Bass Hi-Q Bass Dance Bass STRINGS String Ensemble Chamber Strings Synth Strings Slow Strings No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 Voice Name Tremolo Strings Pizzicato Strings Orchestra Hit Violin Cello Contrabass Banjo Harp CHOIR Choir Vocal Ensemble Vox Humana Air Choir Step 1 Voices Selecting and Playing Other Voices The PSR-292 has a huge total of 605 dynamic and realistic instrument voices. Let’s try a few of them out now... q Press the [VOICE] button. w Select a voice. BritePno or 002 001 f r • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons. GrandPno e Play the keyboard. Want to find out more? See page 23. Playing with the DJ Feature The exciting new DJ feature gives you a full variety of dance and DJ sounds — letting you create your own real-time mixes and groove along with various contemporary rhythms. q Press the [DJ] button. e Play the DJ voices. DJ Set 1 000 r Stop the DJ style. w Play the DJ style. Accompaniment area Want to find out more? See page 22. The DJ starts as soon as you play keys in the accompaniment area of the keyboard. No. 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 Voice Name SAXOPHONE Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Breathy Tenor Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet TRUMPET Trumpet Muted Trumpet Trombone No. 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 Voice Name Trombone Section French Horn Tuba BRASS Brass Section Big Band Brass Mellow Horns Synth Brass Jump Brass Techno Brass FLUTE Flute Piccolo Pan Flute No. 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 Voice Name Recorder Ocarina SYNTH LEAD Square Lead Sawtooth Lead Voice Lead Star Dust Brightness Analogon Fargo SYNTH PAD Fantasia Bell Pad Xenon Pad No. 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Voice Name Equinox Dark Moon PERCUSSION Vibraphone Marimba Xylophone Steel Drums Celesta Tubular Bells Timpani Music Box DRUM KITS Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 No. 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Voice Name Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 13 Quick Guide Step 2 Songs zx xq z GrandPno 001 092 001 xc r w Playing the Songs The PSR-292 is packed with a total of 100 songs, including one Demo song — which has been specially created to showcase the rich and dynamic sounds of the instrument. There are also 99 additional songs, designed to be used with the educational Lesson feature. You can also play songs loaded to the PSR via MIDI. The songs can be stored to song numbers 101-199. (See page 71.) Playing the Demo song Let’s play the Demo song now, Repeating with #001. z Start the Demo song. Playing a single song Naturally, you can also individually select and play back the PSR-292’s songs (001 - 205). z Press the [SONG] button. Just You Just You 001 You can also play back songs of other categories. Simply select the appropriate number of the desired song during playback. 001 x Select a song. x Stop the Demo song. or B Bailey • The PSR-292 also has a Demo and DJ Cancel function that allows you to disable Demo song and DJ function. Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the Function mode (page 76). ]/[ r • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ buttons. f 002 or ] c Start (and stop) the song. Want to find out more? See page 51. 14 Step 2 Songs Recording Your Own Song Much like a multi-track tape recorder, the PSR-292 lets you play and record the individual parts of your own song in real time. q Select the desired User song (201 - 205) for recording. User 2 or the keyboard. The PSR-292 starts recording as soon as you play the first note on the keyboard. 202 • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons. r To stop recording, press the [START/ r f e Start recording by playing a melody on STOP] button. w Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the desired track number button ([1] - [5]). Want to find out more? See page 56. User 2 202 ● Song List No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 Song Name Demo Just The Way You Are Favorites Bill Bailey (Won’t You Please Come Home) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling Down By The Riverside America The Beautiful When The Saints Go Marchin’ In Orchestra Frühlingsstimmen Danse Des Mirlitons From “The Nutcracker” “Orphée Aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances No.10 La Primavera (From Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation De Thais Guillaume Tell Camptown Races Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Pianist Dolly’s Dreaming And Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence No. 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude Op.10-3 “Chanson De L’adieu” Marcia Alla Turca Turkish March Valse Op.64-1 “Peiti Chien” Menuett Nocturne Op.9-2 Moments Musicaux Op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Für Elise Practice Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond Oh! Susanna Greensleeves Aura Lee Londonderry Air Ring De Banjo Wenn Ich Ein Vöglein Wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi-Funicula Turkey In The Straw Old Folks At Home Silent Night Jingle Bells No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 Song Name Muss I Denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Symphonie Nr.9 Song Of The Pearl Fisher Gavotte String Quartet No.17 2nd Mov. “Serenade” Menuett Canon The Danube Waves From “The Magic Flute” Piano Sonate Op.27-2 “Mondschein” “The Surprise” Symphony To A Wild Rose Air de Toréador “Carmen” O Mio Babbino Caro (From “Gianni Schicchi”) Duet Row Row Row Your Boat On Top Of Old Smoky We Wish You A Merry Christmas Scarborough Fair Im Mai O Christmas Tree Mary Had A Little Lamb Ten Little Indians Pop Goes The Weasel Twinkle Twinkle Little Star No. 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 Song Name Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands The Cuckoo O Du Lieber Augustin London Bridge Chord Lesson Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands The Cuckoo O Du Lieber Augustin London Bridge American Patrol Beautiful Dreamer Battle Hymn Of The Republic Home Sweet Home Valse Des Fleurs (From “The Nutcracker”) Aloha Oe I’ve Been Working On The Railroad My Darling Clementine Auld Lang Syne Grandfather’s Clock Amazing Grace My Bonnie Yankee Doodle Joy To The World Ave Maria 15 Quick Guide Step 3 Music Database x zb GrandPno 001 092 001 v z Music Database Here’s a convenient feature that lets you instantly reconfigure the PSR-292 for playing in different music styles. If you want to perform in a certain genre but don’t know what settings to make, simply select the genre from the Music Database — and the PSR292 makes all the right settings for you! Accompaniment area Left hand Auto accompaniment (for example, bass + guitar + drums) • For more infomation on playing proper chords for the auto accompaniment, see “Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering” on page 43 and “Looking up Chords in the Dictionary” on the next page. z Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button. + Right hand Melody x Select a Music Database. Refer to the Music Database List on page 87. or Croco Rk 002 AlvFever 001 f 16 r • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons. Step 3 Music Database Looking up Chords in the Dictionary The convenient Dictionary function teaches you how to play chords by showing you the individual notes. In the example below, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 chord... Keys for entering the chord (C1 – B2) Keys for entering the chord type (C3 – B4) Keys for entering the chord root (C5 – B5) Learning how to play a specific chord Example: c Specify the chord type of the chord (in this case, M7). v Play the notes of the chord as indicated in the keyboard diagram in the display. The chord name flashes when the chord is played properly. G M7 Root note Chord type z Press the [DICTIONARY] button. Chord area Dict. x Specify the root note of the chord (in this case, b To leave the Dictionary function, press the G). [DICTIONARY] button again Want to find out more? See page 45. c Play a chord with your left hand. The style starts as soon as you play the keyboard, letting you play the melody along with accompaniment. For more on chords, see “Looking up Chords in the Dictionary” above. Accompaniment area v Stop the style. Want to find out more? See page 48. 17 Panel Display Indications The PSR-292 features a large multi-function display that shows all important settings for the instrument. The section below briefly explains the various icons and indications in the display. q Notation r Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B. e Beat marks name and number !4 Octave indicator GrandPno 001 092 001 t y u i o Touch indicator Harmony indicator Dual indicator Split indicator Accompaniment On indicator !0 Sync Stop indicator !1 Measure and Tempo !2 Chord !3 Song track indicators w Keyboard q Notation / w Keyboard These two portions of the display conveniently indicate notes. When a song is being played back, they show the melody or chord notes in succession. When you play the keyboard yourself, the display shows the notes you play. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. e Beat marks These marks (one large, three small) flash in sequence and in time with the song or style. The large arrow indicates the first beat of the measure. r Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B. name and number This portion of the display indicates the name and number of the currently selected song, voice, style or M.D.B. It also displays the category name when using the category button, or the name and current setting/value of other functions, as well as other important operation messages. 18 t Touch indicator This appears when the Touch function is turned on. (See page 30.) y Harmony indicator This appears when the Harmony effect is turned on. (See page 31.) u Dual indicator This appears when the Dual function is turned on. (See page 26.) i Split indicator This appears when the Split function is turned on. (See page 27.) o Accompaniment On indicator This appears when the auto accompaniment is turned on. (See page 36.) Panel Display Indications !0 Sync Stop indicator This appears when the Sync Stop function is turned on. (See page 40.) !3 Song track indicators In song recording and playback, these indicate the status of the tracks. (See page 57.) !1 Measure and Tempo These show the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. !4 Octave indicator When note data exceeds the range limit of note display, the “8va” indication appears in the display. !2 Chord When a song (with chords) is being played back, this indicates the current chord root and type. It also indicates chords played in the ACMP area of the keyboard when the Style mode and auto accompaniment are on. Music Stand Insert the bottom edge of the included music stand into the slot located at the top rear of the PSR-292 control panel. 19 Portable Grand This convenient function lets you instantly call up the Grand Piano voice. Playing the Portable Grand Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. GrandPno 001 Doing this automatically selects the special “Stereo Sampled Piano” Grand Piano voice. Using the Metronome 1 Call up the Tempo setting. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. TEMPO 148 148 Current Tempo value 2 Change the value. Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value. or 20 Restoring the Default Tempo Value Each song and style has been given a default or standard Tempo setting. If you’ve changed the Tempo, you can instantly restore the default setting by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously (when Tempo is selected). You can also restore the default Tempo easily by simultaneously holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button and moving the dial. Portable Grand 3 Turn on the Metronome. Press the [METRONOME] button. 148 1 Indicates the beat number in the measure. To turn the Metronome off, press the [METRONOME] button again. Setting the Metronome Time Signature The time signature of the Metronome can be set to various quarter-note based meters. The Time Signature can be set in the Function mode (page 76). Numeric keypad 01 02 03 04 : 15 0 Time signature 1/4 — Plays only “1” beats (all high clicks) 2/4 3/4 4/4 : 15/4 Plays no “1” beats (all low clicks) • The time signature changes automatically when a style or song is selected. Time Sig 04 Indicates current beat number. Adjusting the Metronome Volume You can adjust the volume of the Metronome sound in the Function mode (page 76). The volume range is 000 127. 21 DJ This exciting feature lets you instantly call up a dynamic DJ voice and style for playing contemporary dance music. Playing the DJ 1 Press the [DJ] button. • The PSR-292 has a Demo song and DJ Cancel function that allows you to disable Demo song and DJ function. Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the Function mode (page 76). DJ Set 1 000 Doing this automatically resets the entire instrument for playing the specially programmed DJ voice. 2 Play the DJ style. Play keys in the accompaniment area of the keyboard. • When the DJ style is selected, the accompaniment is triggered by only the root of the chord, letting you play with one finger. Accompaniment area 3 Play the DJ voices. Play the upper area of the keyboard. 4 Stop the DJ style. Accompaniment area (C1 – F#2) FX02 R Ohh2 ev er FX se TB rs O hh 1 Sc ra tc Sc h 1 ra tc h 3 ● For example, when 601 “DJ Set 1” is selected: 22 Jo H o ui h H u ue G a et U p G Sc ra o t Sc ch ra 2 Sc tch ra 4 tc h 5 C3 Playing Voices The PSR-292 features a total of 605 authentic voices — all of which have been created with Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. These include 480 XG voices and drum kits. The PSR-292 also has a Dual Voice or Split Voice function that lets you combine two different voices in a layer, or play from separate areas of the keyboard, play the two together across the keyboard. Playing a Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. Voice name and number GrandPno 001 Select the desired voice number. ] buttons, dial or the SELECT [ > ]/[ r ■ Use the CATEGORY [ [ ] buttons. f The categories of each voice and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete voice list of the available voices is given on page 79. • Selecting the #000 OTS voice calls up a convenient feature — automatically selecting an appropriate voice to best match the current style or song. ]/ < r ● Select the voice CATEGORY Using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] button jumps through the voice numbers according to their category divisions. f 2 Category name GUITAR 23 ]/[ < ● Select the voice number Select a voice by using the dial or the SELECT [ > Playing Voices ] buttons. Jazz Gtr 032 ■ Use the numeric keypad. There are two ways to select voices: 1) directly entering the voice number with the numeric keypad, or 2) using the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the voice numbers. ● Using the numeric keypad Enter the digits of the voice number as listed on page 79. For example, to select voice #109, press “1” on the numeric keypad, then “0”, “9.” For voice numbers beginning with zeroes (such as #042 or #006), the initial zeroes may be omitted. In this case, there is a short pause before the indication appears. Std.Kit1 109 ● Using the [+]/[-] buttons Press the [+] button to select the next voice number, and press the [-] button to select the previous voice. Holding down either button continuously scrolls up or down through the numbers. 24 • Each voice is automatically called up with the most suitable octave range setting. Thus, playing middle C with one voice may sound higher or lower than another voice at the same key. Playing Voices 3 Play the selected voice. Since either the Style, Song or M.D.B. mode is active in the background, you can also play styles, songs or M.D.B., respectively, in the Voice mode by simply pressing the [START/STOP] button. The last selected style, song or M.D.B. will be played. The following parameteres can be set in the Function mode (page 75). CATEGORY Main Voice SELECT Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Drum Kit Voice List (voices 109-120) When one of the 12 Drum Kit voices is selected, you can play different drum and percussion instrument sounds from the keyboard. • For more details, see page 88. No. 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Name Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 LCD Std.Kit1 Std.Kit2 Room Kit Rock Kit Elct.Kit AnlogKit DanceKit Jazz Kit BrushKit SymphKit SFX Kit1 SFX Kit2 ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te C Br u sh Br Tap us h Sl ap C as ta ne St t ick s O pe n R im Sh Si ot de St ic H an k d C la p H i-H at C H i-H los ed at P H i-H eda l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo ur C ow ine be ll Vi br as la p Bo ng o L C on ga H O pe Ti m n ba le Ag L og o L M ar ac as G ui ro Sh C o la ve rt s ● For example, when 109 “Standard Kit 1” is selected: Br Br Se q C lic us k H us h S h Ta wir l p Sn Sw ar irl Sn e R Ba are oll ss H Ba Dr So ss um ft D ru Sof m t Ba Ha ss rd D ru Sn Sna m ar re e H M H Fl oo ar d r Fl To oo m rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal la al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e C al 2 ym ba C Bo l 2 on ng ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab a Sa W sa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le O pe Ji ng n le Be Bel ll T l re e C3 25 Playing Voices #000 OTS This special “voice” is actually a convenient feature which automatically selects a suitable voice for you when you select a style. The voice is selected to best match the style or song you’ve called up. Select voice #000 (OTS). #000 OTS is selected. GrandPno or 000 Dual Voice The Dual Voice function lets you combine two different voices in a layer — one the Main voice, which is selected normally, and the other the Dual voice, which is selected in the Function mode (page 75). You can also set various parameters independently for these voices, such as giving them separate volume, octave, Pan, Reverb, Chorus, and DSP settings. This lets you create an optimum mix for the voices, and enhance the way they blend together. The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75). CATEGORY Dual Voice SELECT Voice Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level To turn the Dual Voice on or off, press the [DUAL] button. GrandPno 001 26 Indicates Dual Voice is on. Playing Voices Split Voice The Split Voice function lets you assign two different Voices to opposite areas of the keyboard, and play one Voice with your left hand while your right plays another. For example, you could play bass with the left hand and play piano with the right. The right-hand (or upper) Voice is selected in the Main Voice mode (page 23), and the left-hand (or lower) Voice is selected in the Function mode (page 75), along with the other Split Voice parameters shown below. The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75). CATEGORY Split Voice SELECT Voice Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level To turn the Split Voice on or off, press the [SPLIT] button. GrandPno Indicates Split Voice is on. 001 Setting the Split Point The Split Point determines the highest key for the split voice and sets the split point. Split Point Split Voice • This setting also affects the split point for the accompaniment area. Main Voice Split Point can be set in the Function mode (page 75). 27 Playing Voices One Touch Setting This convenient feature automatically selects the voice to best match the selected style — simply by pressing one of the two One Touch Setting buttons. Two types of One Touch Settings are available. For each style, you can create and store your own custom One Touch Settings. ● One Touch Setting Parameters Main Voice Voice Number Effect Volume Harmony Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Dual Voice ON/Off Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level * Accompaniment is automatically set to on. Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped). DSP Type On/Off Harmony Type Harmony Volume ■ Calling up a One Touch Setting. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 Select the style. or 2 Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or [2]. OTS 2 28 • One Touch Setting does not function in the Song mode. Playing Voices ■ Creating and Storing a One Touch Setting. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • You can also create and store your own custom One Touch Settings for each of the styles. 1 Select the desired style. 2 Make the desired settings. Change the voice and make any other settings you want to use with the selected style and the One Touch Setting buttons. 3 Press and hold the [MEMORY] button then press the appropriate button — ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or [2]. WRITING! Restoring the Default One Touch Setting data Each One Touch Setting can be restored to its default. To do this, simply press and hold the appropriate One Touch Setting button, [1] or [2]. To restore both buttons to their defaults, simultaneously press and hold both the [1] and [2] buttons. Transpose and Tuning You can also adjust the tuning and change the transposition (key) of the entire PSR-292 sound with the Transpose and Tuning functions. ■ Transpose • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Transpose determines the key of both the main voice and the bass/chord accompaniment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to easily match the pitch of the PSR-292 to other instruments or singers, or play in a different key without changing your fingering. The Transpose settings can be adjusted over a range of ± 12 semitones (± 1 octave). • The Transpose function has no effect on the Drum Kits voices (#109 - #120) and DJ voices (#601 - #605). Transpose can be set in the Function mode (page 75). ■ Tuning • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Tuning determines the fine pitch setting of both the main voice and the bass/chord accompaniment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. The Tuning settings can be adjusted over a range of ± 100 (approx. ± 1 semitone). • The Tuning settings have no effect on the Drum Kit voices (#109 - #120). Tuning can be set in the Function mode (page 75). 29 Playing Voices Touch and Touch Sensitivity The Touch function gives you dynamic, expressive control over the voices, letting you determine how loud or soft the sound is by your playing strength. Turn the Touch function on or off as desired by pressing the [TOUCH] button. • To save the Touch on/off status and the Function parameters to internal memory (flash memory), press and hold the [FUNCTION] button. (See page 78.) Indicates Touch function is on. GrandPno 001 Touch Sensitivity lets you set how the PSR-292 responds to your playing strength, allowing you to customize the keyboard to suit your own playing style. The default Touch Sensitivity is 2 (Medium). Sensitivity can be set in the Function mode (page 75). ● Settings: 1 (Soft) 2 (Medium) 3 (Hard) This results in limited touch response, and produces a relatively narrow dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you play the keys. This lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud). This is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly more detailed control in the soft volume range. When Touch is turned off, a constant volume (corresponding to a velocity value of 80) is produced. 30 Effects The PSR-292 is equipped with a wide variety of effects that can be used to enhance the sound of the voices. The PSR-292 has four separate effect systems — Harmony, Reverb, Chorus and DSP — and each has many different effect types to choose from. Harmony The Harmony section features a variety of performance effects that enhance the melodies you play when using the accompaniment styles of the PSR-292. A total of twenty-six Harmony types are available. (See page 33.) Tremolo, Trill and Echo effects can be used even if accompaniment is off. There are five different Harmony Types that automatically create harmony parts (for notes played in the upper section of the keyboard) to match the accompaniment chords. • For the first five Harmony Types (Duet, Trio, Block, Country, and Octave), chords must be played in the Accompaniment area of the keyboard. The Harmony voice(s) change in pitch to best match the chords you play. • The speed of the Trill, Tremolo, and Echo effects depends on the Tempo setting (page 33). Turn on/off the Harmony effect. Press the [HARMONY] button. Indicates Harmony effect is on. GrandPno • Each voice of the PSR-292 has its own independent Harmony setting. 001 Harmony type and Harmony Volume (when Harmony Type 1 - 5 is selected) can be set in the Function mode (page 76). Reverb The Reverb effect reproduces the natural ambient “wash” of sound that occurs when a instrument is played in a room or concert hall. A total of eight different Reverb types simulating various different performance environments are available. (See page 33.) The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76). CATEGORY Effect Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice • Twelve additional Reverb Types are available when controlling the PSR-292 from a MIDI device. (For details, See page 92.) • Each style of the PSR-292 has its own independent Reverb setting. SELECT Reverb Type Reverb Send Level Reverb Send Level Reverb Send Level 31 Effects Chorus The Chorus effect lets you enhance the sound of the voices with the use of pitch modulation. Two basic types are provided: Chorus and Flanger. Chorus produces a thicker, warmer, and more animated sound, whereas Flanger creates a swirling, metallic effect. A total of four Chorus types are available. (See page 34.) The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76). CATEGORY Effect Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice SELECT Chorus Type Chorus Send Level Chorus Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP The DSP effect section provides distortion and chorus effects, plus a wealth of other useful and dynamic effects for enhancing and changing the sound of the voices. Included among these miscellaneous effects are reverse gate reverb, phaser, rotary speaker, tremolo, echo, delay, distortion, equalization, and wah. A total of thirty-eight DSP types are available. (See page 34.) The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76). CATEGORY Effect Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice 32 SELECT DSP Type DSP Send Level DSP Send Level DSP Send Level • Each voice of the PSR-292 has its own independent DSP setting. • Fifty-one additional DSP Types are available when controlling the PSR-292 from a MIDI device. (For details, see page 92.) Effects ■ Effect Types ● Harmony Types No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Harmony Type Duet Trio Block Country Octave Trill 1/4 note Display Name Duet Trio Block Country Octave Tril1/4 7 Trill 1/6 note Tril1/6 8 Trill 1/8 note Tril1/8 9 Trill 1/12 note Tril1/12 10 Trill 1/16 note Tril1/16 11 Trill 1/24 note Tril1/24 12 Trill 1/32 note Tril1/32 13 Tremolo 1/4 note Trem1/4 14 Tremolo 1/6 note Trem1/6 15 Tremolo 1/8 note Trem1/8 16 Tremolo 1/12 note Trem1/12 17 Tremolo 1/16 note Trem1/16 18 Tremolo 1/24 note Trem1/24 19 Tremolo 1/32 note Trem1/32 20 Echo 1/4 note Echo1/4 21 Echo 1/6 note Echo1/6 22 Echo 1/8 note Echo1/8 23 Echo 1/12 note Echo1/12 24 Echo 1/16 note Echo1/16 25 Echo 1/24 note Echo1/24 26 Echo 1/32 note Echo1/32 Description Harmony types 1 - 5 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or threenote harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types only sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. 3 3 Types 6 - 26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 41). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenthnote triplets. • The Trill effect Types (6 - 12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. 3 • The Tremolo effect Types (13 - 19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20 - 26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Reverb Type Hall 1 Hall 2 Room 1 Room 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Plate 1 Plate 2 Off Display Name Hall1 Hall1 Room1 Room2 Stage1 Stage2 Plate1 Plate2 Off Description Concert hall reverb. Small room reverb. Reverb for solo instruments. Simulated steel plate reverb. No effect. 33 Effects ● Chorus Types No. 1 2 3 4 5 Chorus Type Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Flanger 1 Flanger 2 Off Display Name Chorus1 Chorus2 Flanger1 Flanger2 Off Description Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. No effect. ● DSP Types 34 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 DSP Type Hall 1 Hall 2 Room 1 Room 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Plate 1 Plate 2 Early Reflection 1 Early Reflection 2 Gate Reverb Display Name Hall1 Hall2 Room1 Room2 Stage1 Stage2 Plate1 Plate2 ER1 ER2 Gate1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Reverse Gate Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Flanger 1 Flanger 2 Symphonic Phaser Rotary Speaker 1 Rotary Speaker 2 Tremolo 1 Tremolo 2 Guitar Tremolo Auto Pan Gate2 Chorus1 Chorus2 Flanger1 Flanger2 Symphony Phaser Rotary1 Rotary2 Tremolo1 Tremolo2 Guitar Tremolo AutoPan 25 26 AutoWah DelayLCR 27 28 29 Auto Wah Delay Left - Center Right Delay Left - Right Echo Cross Delay DelayLR Echo CrossDly 30 31 32 33 34 35 Karaoke Distortion Hard Distortion Soft Overdrive Amp Simulation EQ Disco Karaoke D Hard D Soft Overdrv AmpSimu EQ Disco 36 EQ Telephone EQ Tel 37 38 39 3Band EQ 2Band EQ No Effect 3BandEQ 2BandEQ Off Description Concert hall reverb. Small room reverb. Reverb for solo instruments. Simulated steel plate reverb. Early reflections only. Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special effects. Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb. Conventional chorus effect with rich, warm chorusing. Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound. Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing. Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change. Rotary speaker simulation. Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. Simulated electric guitar tremolo. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect. Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions. Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays. Stereo delay, with independent feedback level settings for each channel. Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and right channels. Deep, pronounced echo effect. Hard-edged, warm distortion. Soft, warm distortion. Natural distortion, like that of an overdriven amplifier. Characteristic sound of a guitar amplifier/speaker. Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco music. Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard through a telephone receiver. Equalizer with three separate frequency bands. Equalizer with two separate frequency bands. No effect Selecting and Playing Styles The PSR-292 provides dynamic rhythm/accompaniment patterns (styles) — as well as voice settings appropriate for each style — for various popular musical categories. A total of 135 different styles are available, in several different categories. Each style is made up of separate “sections” — Intro, Main A and B, and Ending — letting you call up different accompaniment sections as you perform. The auto accompaniment features that are built into the rhythms add the excitement of instrumental backing to your performance, letting you control the accompaniment by the chords you play. Auto accompaniment effectively splits the keyboard into two areas: The upper is used for playing a melody line, and the lower (set by default to keys F#2 and lower) is for the auto accompaniment function. The PSR-292 also features the convenient Dictionary function (page 45). Dictionary provides you with a builtin “chord encyclopedia” that teaches you how to play any chord you specify by showing you the appropriate notes in the display. Selecting a Style 1 Press the [STYLE] button. Style name and number 8BtModrn 001 Select the desired style number. The categories of each styles and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete style list of the available styles is given on page 86. < > r ■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT buttons. Turn the dial and select the desired style. Select the appropriate category by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up through the style numbers. f 2 35 Selecting and Playing Styles ■ Use the numeric keypad. Style numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the style number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the styles. Playing the Styles The panel buttons below function as style controls. Pressing this button alternately enables and cancels the bass and chord accompaniment. (See below.) Pressing this button alternately enables and cancels the Sync Start function. (See page 37.) Pressing this button alternately enables and cancels the Sync Stop function. (See page 40.) 1 Pressing this button switches between the Main A and Main B sections, automatically adding a fill-in pattern before changing the section. (See page 42.) This controls the Intro and Ending sections. (See pages 38, 39.) Pressing this button alternately starts and stops style playback. Turn on the auto accompaniment. Press the [ACMP] button to turn on (enable) the auto accompaniment. 8BtModrn 001 Indicates that auto accompaniment is on. 36 Selecting and Playing Styles 2 Start the style. You can do this in one of the following ways: ■ Pressing the [START/STOP] button The rhythm starts playing immediately without bass and chord accompaniment. The currently selected Main A or B section will play. You can select the Main A or B section by pressing the appropriate button — [MAIN A/B] — before pressing the [START/STOP] button. (The display briefly shows the letter of the selected section: “MAIN A” or “MAIN B.”) Indicates selected section (Main A or B). MAIN A ■ Using Tap Tempo to Start This useful feature lets you tap out the speed (tempo) of the style and automatically start the style at that tapped speed. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button four times (or three times for a 3/4 time style), and the style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. You can also change the tempo while the style is playing by tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button twice at the desired tempo. ■ Using Sync Start The PSR-292 also has a Sync Start function that allows you to start the style by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. To use Sync Start, first press the [SYNC START] button (the beat marks all flash to indicate Sync Start standby), then press any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on, play a key or chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.) Auto accompaniment area 37 Selecting and Playing Styles Starting with an Intro section Each style has its own two- or four-measure Intro section. When used with the auto accompaniment, many of the Intro sections also include special chord changes and embellishments to enhance your performance. To start with an Intro section: 1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro. Indicates selected section (Main A or B). MAIN A 2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. Indicates Intro standby. INTRO≥A To actually start the Intro section, press the [START/STOP] button. Using Sync Start with an Intro section You can also use the Sync Start function with the special Intro section of the selected style. To use Sync Start with an Intro section: 1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro. Indicates selected section (MAIN A or B). MAIN A 2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. Indicates Intro standby. INTRO≥A 3) Press the [SYNC START] button to enable Sync Start, and start the Intro section and accompaniment by playing any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on, play a key or chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.) Auto accompaniment area 38 Selecting and Playing Styles 3 Change chords using the auto accompaniment feature. Try playing a few successive chords with your left hand, and notice how the bass and chord accompaniment change with each chord you play. (Refer to page 43 for more information on how to use auto accompaniment.) • The [ACMP] button can also be used to turn off and on the bass/ chord accompaniment while playing — allowing you to create dynamic rhythmic breaks in your performance. • Chords played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard are also detected and played when the style is stopped. In effect, this gives you a “split keyboard,” with bass and chords in the left hand and the normally selected voice in the right. 4 Stop the style. You can do this in one of three ways: ■ Pressing the [START/STOP] button The style stops playing immediately. ■ Using an Ending section Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. The style stops after the Ending section is finished. • To have the Ending section gradually slow down (ritardando) as it is playing, press the [INTRO ENDING] button twice quickly. END/rit. ENDING ■ Pressing the [SYNC START] button This immediately stops the style and automatically enables Sync Start, letting you restart the style by simply playing a chord or key in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. 39 Selecting and Playing Styles Sync Stop This convenient feature lets you stop (or pause) the style by releasing your fingers from the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Playing the chord again restarts the style. This is ideal for putting dynamic breaks in your performance — for example, stopping the rhythm and accompaniment briefly while you play a melodic break or solo with your right hand. 1 Press the [ACMP] button. To turn accompaniment on. 8BtModrn 001 Indicates that auto accompaniment is on. 2 Press the [SYNC STOP] button. Setting Sync Stop to on before starting the style automatically sets Sync Start to on as well. 8BtModrn 001 Indicates that Sync Stop is on. 3 Play a chord on the keyboard (in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard). The style starts as soon as you play a chord. 4 5 6 Stop the style by releasing the chord. To start the style again, play a chord. To turn Sync Stop off, press the [SYNC STOP] button again. To stop the style completely, press the [START/STOP] button. 40 Selecting and Playing Styles Changing the Tempo The tempo of style playback can be adjusted over a range of 32 - 280 bpm (beats per minute). 1 Call up the Tempo setting. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. TEMPO 120 • When style playback is stopped and a different style is selected, the tempo returns to the default setting of the new style. When switching styles during playback, the last tempo setting is maintained. (This allows you to keep the same tempo, even when changing styles.) 120 Current Tempo value 2 Change the value. Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value. or Restoring the Default Tempo Value Each song and style has been given a default or standard Tempo setting. If you’ve changed the Tempo, you can instantly restore the default setting by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously (when Tempo is selected). You can also restore the default Tempo easily by simultaneously holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button and moving the dial. • You can also use the convenient Tap Tempo function to change the tempo by “tapping” a new one in real time. (See page 37.) 41 Selecting and Playing Styles Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins) While the style is playing, you can add variation in the rhythm/accompaniment by pressing the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. This switches between the Main A and Main B sections, automatically playing a fill-in pattern to smoothly lead into the next section. For example, if the Main A section is currently playing, pressing this button automatically plays a fill-in pattern, followed by the Main B section. (See illustration below.) You can also select either the Main A or B section to start by pressing the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button before starting the style. • Rhythm sounds and fill-in sections are not available when one of the Pianist styles (#124 - #135) are selected. This appears while the fill-in pattern is playing. Fill A≥B About the Fill-in Patterns If you press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button before beat 4... ...a fill-in pattern plays immediately until the end of the measure... 1st measure beat 1 2 3 4 If you press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button here, after beat 4... ...and the Main A or B section begins here. 2nd measure 1 2 3 4 ...a fill-in pattern plays from here... 3rd measure 1 2 3 ...and the Main A or B section begins here. Adjusting the Style Volume The playback volume of the style can be adjusted in the Function mode (page 76). This volume control affects only the Style volume. The volume range is 000 127. 42 • Style Volume cannot be changed unless the Style mode is active. Selecting and Playing Styles Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering When it is set to on (page 36), the auto accompaniment function automatically generates bass and chord accompaniment for you to play along with, by using Multi Fingering operation. You can change the chords of the accompaniment by playing keys in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard using either the “Single Finger” or “Fingered” method. With Single Finger you can simply play a one-, two- or three-finger chord indication (see Single Finger Chords below). The Fingered technique is that of conventionally playing all the notes of the chord. Whichever method you use, the PSR-292 “understands” what chord you indicate and then automatically generates the accompaniment. ■ Single Finger Chords • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Chords that can be produced in Single Finger operation are major, minor, seventh and minor seventh. The illustration shows how to produce the four chord types. (The key of C is used here as an example; other keys follow the same rules. For example, Bb7 is played as Bb and A.) C Cm To play a major chord: Press the root note of the chord. C7 To play a minor chord: Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a seventh chord: Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. To play a minor seventh chord: Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). ■ Fingered Chords • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Using the key of C as an example, the chart below shows the types of chords that can be recognized in the Fingered mode. ● Example for “C” chords CmM 7 CmM 7 (9) ( ) ( ( C (b5) CM7 b5 Cm 7 (9) Cm 7 (11) ) CM 7 aug CM7 (#11) ( Caug ) Csus 4 CM 7 (9) CM 7 ) C6 ) C (9) ( C 6 (9) C Cm (9) Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm 7 b5 CmM 7 b5 Cdim Cdim 7 C7 C 7 (13) C 7 (#9) C 7 b5 C 7 aug C 7 sus4 ) ) ) ) ( ( ( ( ) ) C 7 (b13) ( ( ) ( ( ) ( C 7 (b9) ) ) ( ) ( C 7 (#11) C 7 (9) ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm C 1+2+5 * Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 43 Selecting and Playing Styles Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display Major [M] 1-3-5 C C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C(9) C(9) Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 CM7(#11) CM7(#11) 1 - 3 - b5 C(b5) Flatted fifth [(b5)] 44 Cb5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 Csus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9) Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5 Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9) Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13) Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9) Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7(#11) C7(#11) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13) Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C7b5 C7b5 Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C1+2+5 C • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used — with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), 1+2+5. • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Selecting and Playing Styles Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press the [DICTIONARY] button. Dict. 2 Specify the root of the chord. Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord root (as printed on the panel). Dict. Pressing this key selects the root G. 3 Specify the type of the chord (major, minor, seventh, etc.). Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord type (as printed on the panel). • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. • You can also show the inversion of chord when using [+]/[-] button. Notation of chord Dict. Chord name (root and type) Pressing this key selects the major seventh chord type (M7). Individual notes of chord (keyboard) 45 Selecting and Playing Styles 4 Play the chord. Play the chord (as indicated in the display) in the chord area of the keyboard. The chord name flashes in the display when the correct notes are held down. (Inversions for many of the chords are also recognized.) Dict. Indicates notes to be played. Flashes when correct notes are held. To leave the Dictionary function, press the [DICTIONARY] button again. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • What is a Chord? • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The simple answer: Three or more notes played simultaneously is a chord. (Two notes played together is an “interval” — an interval being the distance between two different notes. This is also referred to as a “harmony.”) Depending on the intervals between the three or more notes, a chord can sound beautiful or muddy and dissonant. The organization of notes in the example at left — a triad chord — produces a pleasant, harmonious sound. Triads are made up of three notes and are the most basic and common chords in most music. In this triad, the lowest note is the “root.” The root is the most important note in the chord, because it anchors the sound harmonically by determining its “key” and forms the basis for how we hear the other notes of the chord. The second note of this chord is four semitones higher than the first, and the third is three semitones higher than the second. Keeping our root note fixed and changing these notes by a semitone up or down (sharp or flat), we can create four different chords. Major chord (ex. C) Minor 3rd Major 3rd Minor chord (ex. Cm) Major 3rd Minor 3rd Augmented chord (ex. Caug) Diminished chord (ex. Cdim) Major 3rd Minor 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Keep in mind that we can also change the “voicing” of a chord — for example, change the order of the notes (called “inversions”), or play the same notes in different octaves — without changing the basic nature of the chord itself. Inversion examples for the key of C G E C 46 C G E E C G Selecting and Playing Styles Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner. The use of intervals and chords is one of the most important elements in music. A wide variety of emotions and feelings can be created depending on the types of chords used and the order in which they are arranged. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Writing Chord Names • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Knowing how to read and write chord names is an easy yet invaluable skill. Chords are often written in a kind of shorthand that makes them instantly recognizable (and gives you the freedom to play them with the voicing or inversion that you prefer). Once you understand the basic principles of harmony and chords, it’s very simple to use this shorthand to write out the chords of a song. First, write the root note of the chord in an uppercase letter. If you need to specify sharp or flat, indicate that to the right of the root. The chord type should be indicated to the right as well. Examples for the key of C are shown below. Major chord Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord C Cm Caug Cdim For simple major chords, the type is omitted. One important point: Chords are made up of notes “stacked” on top of each other, and the stacked notes are indicated in the chord name of the chord type as a number — the number being the distance of the note from the root. (See the keyboard diagram below.) For example, the minor 6th chord includes the 6th note of the scale, the major 7th chord has the 7th note of the scale, etc. The Intervals of the Scale Dominant 7th (flatted 7th) To better understand the intervals and the numbers used to represent them in the chord name, study this diagram of the C major scale: C D E F G A B C D E F Root 2nd Other Chords Csus4 5th C7 4th 4th 3rd Dominant 7th Cm7bb5 7th 6th 5th 11th 9th Octave Cm7 Major chord Dominant 7th Cm6 C(9) CM7 Minor chord 7th Major chord Cdim7 * Bbb = A Dominant 7th Diminished chord Minor chord 6th 9th Diminished 7th (double flatted 7th) Diminished chord 47 Using the Music Database If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, simply select the desired genre from the Music Database. The PSR-292 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style! 1 Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button. The MUSIC DATABASE menu appears in the display. AlvFever 001 2 Select a Music Database. The categories of each Music Database and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete list of the available styles in the Music Database is given on page 87. < r > f ■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT buttons. Turn the dial and select the Music Database. Select the appropriate category by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up through the Music Database numbers. XmasWalz 208 ■ Use the numeric keypad. Music Database numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the Music Database number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the Music Database. 48 • Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button to automatically set the Style mode, turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on, and turn SYNCHRONIZED START on. See page 37 for details. Using the Music Database In this example, we will select #208 “Xmas Walz” and play the Song “Silent Night”. Auto accompaniment area 3 Play the chords with your left hand and the melody lines with your right hand along with the music. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. For information on how to enter chords, see “Multi Fingering” on page 43. 4 • See pages 35 through 44 for details about the Style. When you reach the point in the music indicated by the arrow above, press the [ENDING] button. The style plays an ending phrase in ritardando. When the ending is finished, the style automatically stops. You can also stop the style by using the [STOP] button. 49 Using the Music Database Data stored by the Music Database Each of the Music Database settings has been specially programmed to match the selected musical style and each features the best suited voice (or combination of voices), style and other settings. Pressing the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button and selecting a number lets you instantly reconfigure all relevant settings, conveniently allowing you to start playing in the desired genre with all the appropriate sounds — without having to make each setting one by one. ● M.D.B. Parameters Style Main Voice Dual Voice Style Number Accompaniment Split Point MainA/MainB Style Volume Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level ON/Off Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Split Voice Effect Harmony Transpose Tempo * Accompaniment is automatically set to on. Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped). 50 ON/Off Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Split Point Reverb Type Chorus Type DSP Type On/Off Harmony Type Harmony Volume Transpose Tempo Selecting and Playing Songs The PSR-292 features a total of 105 songs. These include 100 songs that showcase the rich and dynamic sounds of the instrument, and 99 of these songs can be used with the educational Lesson feature (page 61), a powerful tool that makes learning songs fun and easy. A special Demo song has also been included, and can be played automatically by pressing the [DEMO] button. Moreover, there are five special User songs to which you can record your own performance. The User songs are “empty” and cannot be played until something has been recorded to them. (For instructions on recording your own songs, see page 56.) You can also transfer song data from your computer to the PSR-292 for playback. For details, see page 71. ● Song Playback Display These display the notes and name of the current chord. Babbino 066 Current measure number 120 012 Indicates the tracks currently playing back. (These can be alternately muted and sounded during playback by pressing the corresponding SONG MEMORY buttons.) About the Beat Display The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. The first arrow indicates the first beat of the measure, and the others flash in sequence. First beat of measure Second beat Third beat Fourth beat Selecting a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. Song name and number Just You 001 51 Selecting and Playing Songs 2 Select the desired song number. The categories of each song and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete list of the available songs is given on page 15. < > r f ■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT buttons. Turn the dial and select the desired song. Select the appropriate category by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up through the song numbers. ■ Use the numeric keypad. Song numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the song number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the song. Listening to the Flash Memory Song The PSR-292 can play a song loaded into its internal flash memory. To do this, you’ll need to connect the PSR-292 to a personal computer, and use the “Song Filer” software to transmit the song from the computer. For more information on Flash songs and Song Filer, refer to page 71. Select the song number 101-199 using the dial or numeric keypad in the same way as preset songs. 52 Selecting and Playing Songs Playing the Songs The Panel buttons below function as Song controls. Turns on the A-B Repeat function (page 54). Pauses playback. Reverses the playback position. Starts and stops song playback. Advances the playback position. About the Song Tracks ● Song track indicators Melody tracks Style track Indicates track is enabled for playing Indicates track is muted or contains no data Track 2 generally contents data for the left hand. The “A” track contents Style (accompaniment) data. Track 1 generally contents data for the right hand. 1 Start the selected song. Press the [START/STOP] button. As the song plays back, the measure number and chords are shown in the display. 2 • You can play along with the song using the currently selected voice, or even select a different voice for playing along. Simply call up the Voice mode while the song is playing back and select the desired voice. (See page 23.) Stop the song. Press the [START/STOP] button. If playback was started by pressing the [START/STOP] button, the selected song stops automatically. 53 Selecting and Playing Songs A-B Repeat The convenient A-B Repeat function is an ideal aid for practicing and learning. It allows you to specify a phrase of a song (between point A and point B) and repeat it — while you play or practice along with it. 1 While playing a song, set point A (the start point). During playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once, at the beginning point to be repeated. • The A and B points can only be specified at the beginning of a measure (beat 1), and not at any point in the middle of a measure. • To set the A point to the beginning of a song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. REPEAT A- 2 006 006 Set point B (the end point). As the song continues playing, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once again, at the ending point to be repeated. The selected phrase repeats indefinitely until stopped. REPEAT A-b 3 012 012 Pause or stop playback as needed. Use the [PAUSE] button or [START/STOP] button. Stopping playback does not cancel the set A/B points or the A-B Repeat function. 4 Turn off the A-B Repeat function. Press the [A-B REPEAT] button. 54 • If you’re repeat practicing a particularly difficult section, try slowing down the Tempo to an appropriate speed to make it easier to play and master the part. You may also want to slow down the Tempo while setting the A and B points; this makes it easier to accurately set the points. • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the song is stopped. Simply use the [REW r] and [FF f] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. Selecting and Playing Songs Melody Voice Change The PSR-292 lets you play a melody on the keyboard along with each of the songs, either with the original melody voice or one of your own selection. The convenient Melody Voice Change feature takes this one step further — it lets you replace the original voice used for the melody of the song with the panel voice of your own selection. For example, if the current voice selected on the panel is piano but the song’s melody is being played by a flute voice, using Melody Voice Change will change the flute melody voice to piano. 1 Select the desired song. Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song. (See page 51.) 2 Select the desired voice. Press the [VOICE] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired voice. (See page 23.) 3 Press and hold down the [VOICE] button for at least one second. “MELODY VOICE CHANGE” appears in the display, indicating that the selected panel voice has replaced the song’s original melody voice. MELODY V Adjusting the Song Volume The playback volume of the song can be adjusted in the Function mode (page 76). This volume control affects only the Song volume. The volume range is 000 127. • Song Volume cannot be changed unless the Song mode is active. (This function becomes Style Volume when the Style mode is active.) 55 Song Recording The PSR-292 features powerful and easy-to-use song recording features that let you record your keyboard performances — using up to six independent tracks (including one track for accompaniment) — for creating your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions. You can record and save up to five User songs. User 1 rEC Song recording on the PSR-292 is similar to using a tape recorder; whatever you play on the keyboard is recorded in real time as you play it. Also, when you record subsequent parts to other tracks, you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones. 001 Song Memory Capacity • Maximum number of notes : approximately 10,000 (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) • Maximum number of chords : approximately 5,500 (when only the chord track is recorded) Recording a User Song Data that can be recorded to the normal (melody) tracks: • Note on/off • Chorus Type* • Velocity • DSP Type* • Voice Number • Sustain • Reverb Type* • Tempo*, Time Signature* (if there is no such data in the Chord track) Data that can be recorded to the Chord track: • Style number* • Chord changes and timing • Changing sections (Intro, Main A/B, etc.) • Style Volume* • Tempo, Time Signature* * These settings can only be recorded once at the beginning of a song; other settings can be changed in the middle of a song. 1 Make all desired PSR-292 settings. Before you actually start recording, you’ll need to make various settings for the song — such as selecting a style, setting the Tempo, and selecting a voice. (See pages 35, 41, and 23.) • When using a Split Voice for recording, the voice assigned to the left of the split point cannot be recorded. If desired, also make other settings. Refer to the list above for settings that can be recorded to a song. Using the Metronome You can use the Metronome instead of a style if desired. This allows you to keep your performance “in time,” even when recording without style. To do this, press the [METRONOME] button before recording in step #4 below. After the song is completely recorded, simply play back the song with the Metronome turned off. (See page 20.) 56 Song Recording 2 Select a User song number for recording. Use the dial or numeric keypad to select the desired song: 201 - 205. If no song is manually selected, the PSR-292 automatically selects the first available empty song number. User 2 or 202 3 Select a track number for recording. While holding down the [REC] button, press the appropriate SONG MEMORY button. User 2 rEC • Keep in mind that all recording operations “replace” the data. In other words, if you record to a track that already has recorded data, all previous data in the track will be erased and replaced by the newly recorded data. 001 ■ Recording to the Chord Track A special Chord track is provided for recording accompaniment data. This is automatically recorded to the Chord track (track A). Selecting the Chord track automatically turns on the accompaniment. • If accompaniment has already been turned on before entering the Record mode, the Chord track is automatically selected. ■ Recording to a Melody Track (1 - 5) Five independent Melody tracks are provided for recording your keyboard performance. Normally, you’ll want to record these after you’ve recorded the Chord track. You can also record the Chord track and one of the Melody tracks simultaneously. 57 Song Recording Muting Tracks During Playback While recording is enabled, you can selectively mute different tracks. This is useful for when you want to clearly hear certain tracks, and not others, during recording. Muting can also be done “on the fly” during playback. To use muting, press the corresponding SONG MEMORY button, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired track number in the display is off. Each press of a SONG MEMORY button (when playback is stopped) cycles through the following settings: Track number off — Track is muted. Track number flashes — Track will record.* * Cannot be selected during playback. Track number on — Track will play back. 4 Start recording. When the beat marks and track number start flashing, you can start recording simply by playing the keyboard (or by pressing the [START/STOP] button). User 2 rEC 001 001 Indicates the current measure If you want to rehearse your part before recording, press the [SYNC START] button to turn Sync Start off. After rehearsing, press [SYNC START] again to return to the above condition. ■ When recording the Chord track With Sync Start on, play the first chord of the song in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. The accompaniment starts automatically and you can continue recording, playing other chords in time with the accompaniment. 5 Stop recording. After you’ve finished playing the part, press the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. 6 Record to other tracks as desired. To do this, simply repeat steps #3 - #5 above. Make sure that when you press the SONG MEMORY button corresponding to the desired track, the track number in the display flashes. 7 Listen to your new recording. To play back the song from the beginning, simply press the [START/STOP] button again. Playback stops when the [START/STOP] button is pressed again. 58 Song Recording Song Clear The Song Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on all tracks of a selected User song. Use this operation only when you’re sure you want to erase a song and record a new one. To erase an individual track of a song while leaving the other tracks intact, use the Track Clear operation (page 60). 1 Select the desired song. Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song (201 - 205). User 2 202 2 While holding down the [A] button, press SONG MEMORY button [1]. All track indications in the display flash, indicating that all tracks are to be erased. ClrUser2 YES 3 4 Press the [+/YES] button. At the “Sure?” prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press the [-/NO] button to abort. Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Song Clear operation. Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts. WRITING! 59 Song Recording Track Clear The Track Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on a selected track of a selected User song, leaving the other tracks intact. Use this operation only when you’re sure you want to erase a track and record a new one. To erase the data of an entire song, use the Song Clear operation (page 59). 1 Select the desired song. Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song (201 - 205). User 2 202 2 Press and hold down the button corresponding to the track to be erased. Press and hold down the appropriate SONG MEMORY button ([1] - [5], [A]) for at least one second. ClrTr1 YES 3 4 Press the [+/YES] button. At the “Sure?” prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press the [-/NO] button to abort. Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Track Clear operation. Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts. WRITING! 60 Song Lesson The Lesson feature provides an exceptionally fun and easy-to-use way to learn how to read music and play the keyboard. Lesson lets you practice the left- and right-hand parts of each song independently, step by step, until you’ve mastered them and are ready to practice with both hands together. These practices are divided into four Lesson steps, as described below. Lessons 1 - 3 apply to each hand; press the appropriate button, [L] (left) or [R] (right) to select the desired part for practice. Naturally, you can also use Song data you’ve loaded from computer with the Lesson features. ■ Lesson 1 — Timing This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note can be used, as long as you play in rhythm. ■ Lesson 2 — Waiting In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes before continuing playback of the song. ■ Lesson 3 — Minus One This lesson step plays back the song with one part muted, letting you play and master the missing part yourself — in rhythm and at the proper tempo. ■ Lesson 4 — Both Hands Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3, except that both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play and master both hands at the same time. Using the Lesson Feature 1 Select one of the Lesson songs. Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial or numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song. or FurElise 036 The songs are divided into several different categories or music genres. 61 Song Lesson 2 Select the part you wish to work on (left or right) and the Lesson step. If you want to work on the right-hand part, press the [R] button; to work on the left, press the [L] button. Pressing either button repeatedly cycles through the available Lesson steps in order: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1, etc. The selected Lesson step is indicated in the display. Timing Timing L 1 r1 Waiting Waiting L 2 r2 MinusOne MinusOne L 3 FurElise r3 FurElise (Song Lesson off) 036 (Song Lesson off) 036 To select Lesson 4, press both [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously. BothHand Lr4 3 Start the Lesson. The Lesson and song playback start automatically (following a lead-in count) as soon as the Lesson step is selected. When the Lesson is finished, your performance “grade” is shown in the display (if the Grade function is turned on; page 65). After a short pause, the Lesson begins again automatically. * * * å * r1 4 060 001 Asterisks appear indicating the timing at which you should play the notes. The line of asterisks represents one full measure. Sixteenth notes are indicated by an alternating asterisk and sharp sign. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the Lesson. The PSR-292 exits from the Lesson feature automatically when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed. 62 Song Lesson Select the Lesson Track This function allows you to select the track number of a loaded song from computer (only SMF format 0). The track number of the song can be specified in the Function mode (page 76). Lesson 1 — Timing This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note can be used, as long as you play in rhythm. Pick a note to play. For the left hand, use a note in the auto accompaniment area or play the appropriate left-hand note; for the right, play a note above F#2. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. 1 2 • The melody note does not sound unless your playing is in time with the rhythm. Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 1. Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 1 is indicated. Timing r1 3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 1, simply play one note repeatedly in time with the music. Regarding chords and the use of the left hand, the PSR-292 actually has two different types of songs: 1) songs with normal left-hand chords, and 2) songs in which the left hand plays arpeggios or melodic figures in combination with the right. In the case of the first type, play the chords with your left hand in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Auto accompaniment area 63 Song Lesson Lesson 2 — Waiting In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes before continuing playback of the song. This lets you practice reading the music at your own pace. The notes to be played are shown in the display, one after another, as you play them correctly. 1 2 Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 2. Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 2 is indicated. Waiting r2 3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 2, play the correct notes at your own pace, until you can master playing them in rhythm. Lesson 3 — Minus One This lesson step lets you practice one part of the song in rhythm at the proper tempo. The PSR-292 plays back the song accompaniment with one part muted (either the left part or the right)— letting you play and master the missing part yourself. The notes you are to play are shown continuously in the display as the song plays back. 1 2 Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 3. Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 3 is indicated. MinusOne r3 64 Song Lesson 3 Play the appropriate part with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 3, listen carefully to the un-muted part, and play the muted part yourself. Lesson 4 — Both Hands Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3, except that both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play and master both hands at the same time. Go on to this lesson step after you’ve mastered each hand’s part in the previous three lesson steps. Practice both hands in time with the rhythm along with the notation in the display. 1 2 Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 4. Press the [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously, so that Lesson 4 is indicated. BothHand Lr4 3 Play both the left- and right-hand parts with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 4, both parts (left and right) are muted, letting you play the entire song by yourself. Grade The Lesson feature has a built-in evaluation function that monitors your practicing of the Lesson songs, and just like a real teacher, it tells you how well you did each exercise. Four grades are assigned, depending on your performance: “OK,” “Good,” “Very Good,” and “Excellent.” • Grade is automatically set to on as the default setting. The evaluation function can be set to on/off in the Function mode (page 76). 65 MIDI Functions The PSR-292 is MIDI-compatible, featuring MIDI IN and MIDI OUT terminals and providing a variety of MIDI-related controls. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your musical possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your PSR-292. What Is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production L Sampling Note Tone Generator (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR-292 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. ● Example of Keyboard Information Voice number (with what voice) Note number (with which key) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Velocity (about how strong) 01 (grand piano) 60 (C3) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) 20 (strong) GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level 1. The PSR-292 supports GM System Level 1. 66 MIDI Functions MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The PSR-292 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The PSR-292 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the PSR-292 can receive/transmit. ● Channel Messages The PSR-292 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name Note ON/OFF Program Change Control Change PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is stuck. Voice number (along with corresponding bank select MSB/LSB settings, if necessary). Messages that are used to change some aspect of the sound (modulation, volume, pan, etc.). ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name Exclusive Message Realtime Messages PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc. Start/stop operation The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-292 are shown in the MIDI Implementation Chart on page 90. MIDI Terminals In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must be connected by a cable. The MIDI terminals of the PSR-292 are located on the rear panel. MIDI IN MIDI OUT Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device. Transmits the PSR-292’s keyboard information as MIDI data to another MIDI device. • Special MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc. • Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters. Cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. 67 MIDI Functions Connecting to a Personal Computer By connecting your PSR-292’s MIDI terminals to a personal computer, you can have access to a wide variety of music software. ● When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-292. MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN PSR-292 MIDI OUT Computer (sequencer software) ● When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, as shown in the diagram below. MIDI Interface RS-422 MIDI IN PSR-292 Viewing the Notation for MIDI Channel 1 • The PSR-292 has a special function that lets you view the notes of the MIDI data (channel 1 only) on the display. MIDI OUT Computer (sequencer software) ● When connecting to a computer with a USB interface, use the Yamaha UX16 USB/MIDI Interface. Connect the UX16 and the computer with a standard USB cable, then make the proper MIDI connections between the PSR-292 and the UX16. UX16 MIDI IN OUT IN USB Computer (sequencer software) 68 MIDI OUT • When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the software you are using. PSR-292 MIDI Functions Local Control This function lets you enable or disable keyboard control over the PSR-292’s voices in the Function mode (page 76). This would come in handy, for example, when recording notes to MIDI sequencer. If you are using the sequencer to play back the voices of the PSR-292, you would want to set this to “off” — in order to avoid getting “double” notes, both from the keyboard and from the sequencer. Normally, when playing the PSR-292 by itself, this should be set to “on.” • No sound is output from the PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF is set to OFF. Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer The most common use for the Initial Setup Send function is in recording a song on a sequencer that is intended for playback with the PSR-292. Essentially, this takes a “snapshot” of the PSR-292 settings and sends that data to the sequencer. By recording this “snapshot” at the start of the song (before any actual performance data), you can instantly restore the necessary settings on the PSR-292 in the Function mode (page 76). Provided there is a pause in the song, you could also do this in the middle of a song — for example, completely changing the PSR292 settings for the next section of the song. • When the Initial Setup Send operation is completed, the PSR292 automatically returns to the previous panel condition. External Clock This determines whether the style and song playback functions are controlled by the PortaTone’s internal clock (off) or by MIDI clock data from an external sequencer or computer (on). This should be set to on when you want to have style or song playback follow the external device (such as a rhythm machine or a sequencer). The default setting is off. • If External Clock is set to ON, style or song playback will not start unless external clock are received. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). Bulk Data Send This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another device (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer). These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). ● Bulk Data Receive Send the Bulk Data from computer or sequencer to the PSR-292. • Keep in mind that all recorded Song data and One Touch Setting data operations replace the data. 69 MIDI Functions Keyboard Out This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). Style Out This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). Song Out This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). • For the Song #001, data is not transmitted. MIDI LSB Receive Cancel Determines whether the LSB data of Bank Select is received or not. Press and hold the lowest key and turn on the power to change the setting (LSB is ignored). To restore MIDI LSB Receive Cancel to normal (LSB is recognized), turn on the power again normally. 70 MIDI Functions Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory The PSR-292’s internal flash memory enables you to save song data transmitted from a connected personal computer. You can play or practice Flash songs (saved in flash memory) in the same way as preset songs. To transmit song data from a personal computer to the PSR-292, you first need to install the “Song Filer” application to your computer. Song data that can be saved in flash memory: • The number of songs: • Available memory: • Data format: max. 99 songs (Song #101–#199) 352 KB SMF format 0 ■ Installing Song Filer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • You can download the “Song Filer” application from the following Yamaha PK CLUB website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection. Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ • Visit the Yamaha PK CLUB website for more information on the latest version of Song Filer (version 2.0.0 or higher) and how to install it. System requirements for Song Filer: [Windows] OS: CPU: Available Memory: Free space in Hard Disk: Display: Windows 95/98/Me/2000 Pentium/100MHz or faster 8MB or more 2MB or more 800 x 600, 256 colors or more [Macintosh] OS: CPU: Available Memory: Free space in Hard Disk: Display: Mac OS 7.5 or upper Power PC or upper 8MB or more 2MB or more 800 x 600, 256 colors or more 71 MIDI Functions ■ Song Filer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • After you install Song Filer and connect the PSR-292 to the computer, you can use the two functions described below. ● Transmit Files You can transmit song files from your computer to your PSR-292’s Flash Memory. • Refer to page 68 for information on connecting the PSR-292 to a computer. • You cannot use the Song Filer’s “Receive Files” function with the PSR-292. • For more information on using Song Filer, refer to the PDF manual included in the Song Filer application. Transmit PSR-292 Computer ● Manage Files on Flash Memory You can delete and rename files in your PSR-292’s Flash Memory from your computer. Delete Rename abcd.mid abcd.mid • Never attempt to turn the power off while transmitting song data. Doing so will not only result in failure to save the data, but also make the internal flash memory unstable. It may also clear all the data residing in the flash memory when turning the power on and off. • Saved data in the instrument may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Retain important data to your computer or floppy disk. efgh.mid Selecting a right & left hand guide track You can select a track in the Function mode (page 76) to guide your right and left hand fingering during the Lesson (page 63). This function is available only when you select a flash memory song (SMF format 0). 72 MIDI Functions PC Mode The PC Mode lets you instantly reconfigure the MIDI control settings for use with a computer or MIDI device. ● Default settings PC mode is on LOCAL ON/OFF EXTERNAL CLOCK KEYBOARD OUT STYLE OUT SONG OUT PC mode is off ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ■ To turn the PC mode on or off: Press the [PC] button and then press the appropriate [+]/[-] button. This switches between the PC Mode on/off settings. PC Mode on ■ To store the PC mode parameters: 1 Change the PC mode parameters. Change the desired MIDI parameters in the Function mode. The following PC Mode parameters can be stored to memory. LOCAL ON/OFF EXTERNAL KEYBOARD STYLE OUT SONG OUT 2 • No sound is output from the PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF is set to OFF. • If External Clock is set to ON, style or song playback will not start unless external clock are received. Store the parameters to the PC memory. Press and hold the [PC] button until “WRITING!” appears in the LCD. WRITING! 73 Function The PSR-292 has a variety of settings in the Function parameters. These give you detailed control over many of the PSR-292’s features. Using the Function parameters Press the Function button. OVERALL ]/[ ] buttons to select a Function name. M.Volume 104 3 Input the appropriate value or use the [+]/[-] buttons to set the selected Function. You can also use the dial. or 74 f Use the SELECT [ < Select a Function name. > 2 • To save the Function parameters and the Touch on/off status to internal memory (flash memory), press and hold the [FUNCTION] button. (See page 78.) r 1 • Use the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons when selecting the category steps. Function ● Function parameters CATEGORY SELECT Overall Transpose Transpos Tuning Tuning Split Point SplitPnt Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice Display Range/ Settings -12–12 -100–100 000–127 Description This determines the transposition of the entire PSR-292 sound. This determines the pitch of the entire PSR-292 sound . This determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point” — in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. (The Split voice sounds up to and including the Split Point key.) The default Split Point is 054 (F#2). The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 1–3 A setting of “1” results in limited touch response; this setting produces a relatively narrow dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you play the keys. “2” lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud), while “3” is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly more detailed control in the soft volume range. When Touch is turned off (page 30), a constant velocity value of 80 is produced (total velocity range = 0–127). 0–127 This determines the volume of the Main voice, letting you create an optimum mix with the Dual or Split voice. -2–2 This determines the octave range for the Main voice. Use this to set the (octave) most suitable range for the Main voice. 0 (full left)–64 This determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. * * * * Touch Sensitivity TouchSns Volume M.Volume Octave M.Octave Pan M.Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Voice Volume M.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect. M.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Cho- * rus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect. M.DspLvl 0–127 * D.Voice D.Volume 1–605 0–127 Octave D.Octave -2–2 (octave) Pan D.Pan 0 (full left)–64 (center) –127 (full right) Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Voice Volume D.RevLvl 0–127 D.ChoLvl 0–127 D.DspLvl 0–127 S.Voice S.Volume 1–605 0–127 Octave S.Octave -2–2 (octave) Pan S.Pan 0 (full left)–64 (center) –127 (full right) Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level S.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect. This select the dual voice. This determines the volume of the Dual voice, letting you create an optimum mix with the Main voice. This determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Use this to create an octave layer with the Main voice. This determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value. This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Dual voice. This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Dual voice. This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Dual voice. This select the split voice. This determines the volume of the Split voice, letting you create an optimum mix with the Main voice. This determines the octave range for the Split voice. Use this to set the most suitable range for the Split (lower) voice. This determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value. This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Split voice. S.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Split voice. * S.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Split voice. * (center) –127 (full right) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously. 75 Function CATEGORY SELECT Display Effect Reverb Type Chorus Type DSP Type Reverb Range/ Settings 1–9 Chorus 1–5 DSP 1–39 Harmony Type Harmony Volume HarmType 1–26 HarmVol 0–127 Local On/ Off External Clock Bulk Data Send Local On/Off ExtClock On/Off BulkSend YES/NO Initial Setup Send InitSend YES/NO Keyboard Out KbdOut On/Off Style Out StyleOut On/Off Song Out SongOut On/Off Style StyleVol 0–127 Song Volume Time Signature Lesson Track (R) Lesson Track (L) Grade On/ Off Demo and DJ Cancel Song8Vol Mtr8Vol Time8Sig 0–127 0–127 0–15 R-Part 1–16 L-Part 1–16 Grade On/Off D-Cancel On/Off Harmony MIDI Volume Metronome Lesson Utility Description This determines the Reverb type, including “off.” (See the list on page 33). This determines the Chorus type, including “off.” (See the list on page 34). This determines the DSP type, including “off.” (See the list on page 34). This determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 33). This determines the level of the Harmony effect when Harmony type 1-5 is selected, letting you create the optimum mix with the original melody note. This determines the Local on or off. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Local Control to on or off. This determines the External clock or Internal clock. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set External clock or Internal clock. This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another device (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer). Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data. Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission. This lets you save PortaTone initial data to another device (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer). Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data. Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission. This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is transmitted or not. Use the [+]/[-] buttons to change the setting. This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set the Style Out to on or off. This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Song Out to on or off. (For song #001, data is not transmitted.) This determines the volume of the style, letting you create an optimum mix with your performance. This determines the volume of the Song. This determines the volume of the Metronome. This determines the time signature of the Metronome. * This determines the track number for your right hand lesson. This setting is effective only loaded song. This determines the track number for your left hand lesson. This setting is effective only loaded song. This determines whether Grade function is on or off. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Grade to on or off. This determines the Demo and DJ cancel is enabled or not. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Demo and DJ Cancel to on or off. * * The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously. 76 * * * * * * * * * Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the PSR-292 is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the PSR-292 is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-292 may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the PSR-292. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 69.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 45), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The sound of the voices or rhythms seems unusual or strange. The battery power is too low. Replace the batteries. (See page 10.) The auto accompaniment doesn’t turn on, even when pressing the [ACMP] button. Make sure the Style mode is active before using the auto accompaniment. Press the [STYLE] button to enable style operations. The style or song does not play back even when pressing the [START/STOP] button. Check the External Clock on/off. (See page 69.) The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 42) is set to an appropriate level. Make sure that the Split Point (page 27) is set to an appropriate value. When playing back one of the Pianist styles (#124 - #135), the rhythm cannot be heard. This is normal. The Pianist styles have no drums or bass — only piano accompaniment. The accompaniment of the style can only be heard when accompaniment is set to ON and keys are played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The PSR-292 is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs when using the PSR-292 with a sequencer. (This may also sound like a “dual” layered sound of two voices, even when Dual is turned off.) When using the style with a sequencer, set MIDI Echo (or the relevant control) to “off.” (Refer to the owner’s manual of your particular device and/or software for details.) The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. 77 Data Backup & Initialization ■ Data Backup • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The following data can be stored to internal flash memory as data backup. Group SONG ONE TOUCH SETTING PC FUNCTION Touch Parameter User Song Data See page 28. PC Memory Tuning Split Point Touch Sensitivity Style Volume Song Volume Metronome Volume Grade On/Off Demo & DJ Cancel Touch On/Off ● About the Internal Flash Memory The Song, One Touch Setting and PC parameters are automatically stored when each saving operation is done. Function and touch On/Off are stored when Pressing and Holding the Function button. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal flash memory and result in loss of data. ■ Data Initialization • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ● All Data Initialization All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key and highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard. “All Mem CLr” will appear briefly on the display. • All data listed above, plus loaded song data, will be erased and/or changed when the All Data Initialization procedure is carried out. • Carrying out the data initialization procedure will usually restore normal operation if the PSR-292 freezes or begins to act erratically for any reason. All Mem CLr ● Loaded Song Initializaion You can erase only the loaded song data by turning on the power while holding the highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard. 78 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The PSR-292 has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto Accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the PSR-292 via MIDI from an external device. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 001 002 003 004 005 006 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 112 112 113 112 007 008 009 010 011 012 0 0 0 0 0 0 114 112 112 113 114 112 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 112 116 112 114 118 119 114 112 113 112 025 026 027 028 0 0 0 0 113 112 113 112 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 113 112 113 112 117 112 112 112 039 040 0 0 112 112 MIDI Program Voice Name Change# PIANO 0 Grand Piano 1 Bright Piano 3 Honky-tonk Piano 2 MIDI Grand Piano 2 CP 80 6 Harpsichord E.PIANO 4 Galaxy EP 4 Funky Electric Piano 5 DX Modern Elec. Piano 5 Hyper Tines 5 Venus Electric Piano 7 Clavi ORGAN 16 Jazz Organ 1 16 Jazz Organ 2 17 Click Organ 16 Bright Organ 18 Rock Organ 18 Purple Organ 16 16'+2' Organ 16 16'+4' Organ 16 Theater Organ 19 Church Organ 19 Chapel Organ 20 Reed Organ ACCORDION 21 Traditional Accordion 21 Musette Accordion 23 Bandoneon 22 Harmonica GUITAR 24 Classical Guitar 25 Folk Guitar 25 12Strings Guitar 26 Jazz Guitar 26 Octave Guitar 27 Clean Guitar 27 60’s Clean Guitar 28 Muted Guitar 29 Overdriven Guitar 30 Distortion Guitar BASS 32 Acoustic Bass 33 Finger Bass Bank Select Voice No. MSB 041 042 043 044 045 046 0 0 0 0 0 0 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 059 060 061 062 0 0 0 0 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 072 073 074 075 076 077 0 0 0 0 0 0 078 079 080 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 112 34 Pick Bass 112 35 Fretless Bass 112 36 Slap Bass 112 38 Synth Bass 113 38 Hi-Q Bass 113 39 Dance Bass STRINGS 112 48 String Ensemble 112 49 Chamber Strings 112 50 Synth Strings 113 49 Slow Strings 112 44 Tremolo Strings 112 45 Pizzicato Strings 112 55 Orchestra Hit 112 40 Violin 112 42 Cello 112 43 Contrabass 112 105 Banjo 112 46 Harp CHOIR 112 52 Choir 113 52 Vocal Ensemble 112 53 Vox Humana 112 54 Air Choir SAXOPHONE 112 64 Soprano Sax 112 65 Alto Sax 112 66 Tenor Sax 114 66 Breathy Tenor 112 67 Baritone Sax 112 68 Oboe 112 69 English Horn 112 70 Bassoon 112 71 Clarinet TRUMPET 112 56 Trumpet 112 59 Muted Trumpet 112 57 Trombone 113 57 Trombone Section 112 60 French Horn 112 58 Tuba BRASS 112 61 Brass Section 113 61 Big Band Brass 119 61 Mellow Horns 79 Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB 081 082 083 0 0 0 084 085 086 087 088 0 0 0 0 0 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 096 097 098 099 100 0 0 0 0 0 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 112 62 Synth Brass 113 62 Jump Brass 114 62 Techno Brass FLUTE 112 73 Flute 112 72 Piccolo 112 75 Pan Flute 112 74 Recorder 112 79 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 112 80 Square Lead 112 81 Sawtooth Lead 112 85 Voice Lead 112 98 Star Dust 112 100 Brightness 115 81 Analogon 119 81 Fargo SYNTH PAD 112 88 Fantasia 113 100 Bell Pad 112 91 Xenon Pad 112 94 Equinox 113 89 Dark Moon PERCUSSION 112 11 Vibraphone 112 12 Marimba 112 13 Xylophone 112 114 Steel Drums 112 8 Celesta 112 14 Tubular Bells 112 47 Timpani 112 10 Music Box DRUM KITS 0 0 Standard Kit 1 0 1 Standard Kit 2 0 8 Room Kit 0 16 Rock Kit 0 24 Electronic Kit 0 25 Analog Kit 0 27 Dance Kit 0 32 Jazz Kit 0 40 Brush Kit 0 48 Symphony Kit 0 0 SFX Kit 1 0 1 SFX Kit 2 ● XG Voice List 80 Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 18 40 41 0 1 0 MIDI Program Change# PIANO 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 Voice Name Grand Piano Grand Piano KSP Mellow Grand Piano Piano Strings Dream Bright Piano Bright Piano KSP Electric Grand Piano Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 32 40 41 0 1 0 1 18 32 40 140 0 45 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 0 1 32 33 34 40 41 42 150 0 45 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 25 35 0 1 27 64 65 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 0 1 45 0 1 64 97 98 0 0 96 97 0 35 96 97 180 181 182 183 184 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 33 34 35 MIDI Program Change# 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 Voice Name Electric Grand Piano KSP Detuned CP80 Layered CP 1 Layered CP 2 Honky-tonk Piano Honky-tonk Piano KSP Electric Piano 1 Electric Piano 1 KSP Mellow Electric Piano 1 Chorus Electric Piano 1 Hard Electric Piano Velocity Crossfade Electric 4 Piano 1 4 60’s Electric Piano 1 5 Electric Piano 2 5 Electric Piano 2 KSP 5 Chorus Electric Piano 2 5 DX Electric Piano Hard 5 DX Legend 5 DX Phase Electric Piano 5 DX + Analog Electric Piano 5 DX Koto Electric Piano Velocity Crossfade Electric 5 Piano 2 6 Harpsichord 6 Harpsichord KSP 6 Harpsichord 2 6 Harpsichord 3 7 Clavi 7 Clavi KSP 7 Clavi Wah 7 Pulse Clavi 7 Pierce Clavi CHROMATIC 8 Celesta 9 Glockenspiel 10 Music Box 10 Orgel 11 Vibraphone 11 Vibraphone KSP 11 Hard Vibraphone 12 Marimba 12 Marimba KSP 12 Sine Marimba 12 Balimba 12 Log Drums 13 Xylophone 14 Tubular Bells 14 Church Bells 14 Carillon 15 Dulcimer 15 Dulcimer 2 15 Cimbalom 15 Santur ORGAN 16 DrawOrg 16 DetDrawOrg 16 60sDrawOrg1 16 60sDrawOrg2 16 70sDrawOrg1 Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36 37 38 40 64 65 66 67 0 24 32 33 37 0 64 65 66 0 32 35 40 64 65 0 40 0 32 0 32 0 64 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 25 43 96 0 16 35 40 MIDI Program Change# 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 GUITAR 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 225 0 41 25 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 96 0 18 32 0 32 0 40 41 43 45 0 43 0 40 41 0 25 26 26 26 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 30 30 30 31 Voice Name DrawOrg2 60sDrawOrg3 Even Bar 16+2"2/3 Organ Bass 70sDrawOrg2 Cheezy Organ DrawOrg3 Percussive Organ 70’s Percussive Organ Detuned Percussive Organ Light Organ Percussive Organ 2 Rock Organ Rotary Organ Slow Rotary Fast Rotary Church Organ Church Organ 3 Church Organ 2 Notre Dame Organ Flute Tremolo Organ Flute Reed Organ Puff Organ Accordion Accord It Hamonica Harmonica 2 Tango Accordion Tango Accordion 2 Nylon Guitar Nylon Guitar 2 Nylon Guitar 3 Velocity Guitar Harmonics Ukulele Steel Guitar Steel Guitar 2 12-string Guitar Nylon & Steel Guitar Steel Guitar with Body Sound Mandolin Jazz Guitar Mellow Guitar Jazz Amp Clean Guitar Chorus Guitar Muted Guitar Funk Guitar 1 Muted Steel Guitar Funk Guitar 2 Jazz Man Overdriven Guitar Guitar Pinch Distortion Guitar Feedback Guitar Feedback Guitar 2 Guitar Harmonics Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 243 244 0 0 65 66 245 246 0 0 0 40 MIDI Program Change# 31 31 BASS 32 32 247 0 45 32 248 249 250 0 0 0 0 18 27 33 33 33 251 0 40 33 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 43 45 65 0 28 0 32 33 34 96 97 0 27 32 0 43 0 18 20 24 35 40 64 65 66 96 0 6 12 18 19 32 40 41 64 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 8 40 0 0 40 0 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 STRING 40 40 41 42 43 44 44 44 45 46 46 47 Voice Name Guitar Feedback Guitar Harmonics 2 Acoustic Bass Jazz Rhythm Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass Finger Bass Finger Dark Flange Bass Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar Finger Slap Bass Finger Bass 2 Modulated Bass Pick Bass Muted Pick Bass Fretless Bass Fretless Bass 2 Fretless Bass 3 Fretless Bass 4 Synth Fretless Smooth Fretless Slap Bass 1 Resonant Slap Punch Thumb Bass Slap Bass 2 Velocity Switch Slap Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 1 Dark Fast Resonant Bass Acid Bass Clavi Bass Techno Synth Bass Orbiter Square Bass Rubber Bass Hammer Synth Bass 2 Mellow Synth Bass Sequenced Bass Click Synth Bass Synth Bass 2 Dark Smooth Synth Bass Modular Synth Bass DX Bass X Wire Bass Violin Slow Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Strings Slow Tremolo Strings Suspense Strings Pizzicato Strings Orchestral Harp Yang Chin Timpani 81 Voice List 82 Bank Select Voice No. MSB 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 347 0 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# ENSEMBLE 0 48 Strings 1 3 48 Stereo Strings 8 48 Slow Strings 24 48 Arco Strings 35 48 60’s Strings 40 48 Orchestra 41 48 Orchestra 2 42 48 Tremolo Orchestra 45 48 Velocity Strings 0 49 Strings 2 3 49 Stereo Slow Strings 8 49 Legato Strings 40 49 Warm Strings 41 49 Kingdom 64 49 70’s Strings 65 49 String Ensemble 3 0 50 Synth Strings 1 27 50 Resonant Strings 64 50 Synth Strings 4 65 50 Synth Strings 5 0 51 Synth Strings 2 0 52 Choir Aahs 3 52 Stereo Choir 16 52 Choir Aahs 2 32 52 Mellow Choir 40 52 Choir Strings 0 53 Voice Oohs 0 54 Synth Voice 40 54 Synth Voice 2 41 54 Choral 64 54 Analog Voice 0 55 Orchestra Hit 35 55 Orchestra Hit 2 64 55 Impact BRASS 0 56 Trumpet 16 56 Trumpet 2 17 56 Bright Trumpet 32 56 Warm Trumpet 0 57 Trombone 18 57 Trombone 2 0 58 Tuba 16 58 Tuba 2 0 59 Muted Trumpet 0 60 French Horn 6 60 French Horn Solo 32 60 French Horn 2 37 60 Horn Orchestra 0 61 Brass Section Trumpet & Trombone 35 61 Section 40 61 Brass Section 2 41 61 High Brass 42 61 Mellow Brass 0 62 Synth Brass 1 12 62 Quack Brass 20 62 Resonant Synth Brass 24 62 Poly Brass 27 62 Synth Brass 3 Bank Select Voice No. MSB 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 32 62 Jump Brass 45 62 Analog Velocity Brass 1 64 62 Analog Brass 1 0 63 Synth Brass 2 18 63 Soft Brass 40 63 Synth Brass 4 41 63 Choir Brass 45 63 Analog Velocity Brass 2 64 63 Analog Brass 2 REED 0 64 Soprano Sax 0 65 Alto Sax 40 65 Sax Section 43 65 Hyper Alto Sax 0 66 Tenor Sax 40 66 Breathy Tenor Sax 41 66 Soft Tenor Sax 64 66 Tenor Sax 2 0 67 Baritone Sax 0 68 Oboe 0 69 English Horn 0 70 Bassoon 0 71 Clarinet PIPE 0 72 Piccolo 0 73 Flute 0 74 Recorder 0 75 Pan Flute 0 76 Blown Bottle 0 77 Shakuhachi 0 78 Whistle 0 79 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 0 80 Square Lead 6 80 Square Lead 2 8 80 LM Square 18 80 Hollow 19 80 Shroud 64 80 Mellow 65 80 Solo Sine 66 80 Sine Lead 0 81 Sawtooth Lead 6 81 Sawtooth Lead 2 8 81 Thick Sawtooth 18 81 Dynamic Sawtooth 19 81 Digital Sawtooth 20 81 Big Lead 24 81 Heavy Synth 25 81 Waspy Synth 40 81 Pulse Sawtooth 41 81 Dr. Lead 45 81 Velocity Lead 96 81 Sequenced Analog 0 82 Calliope Lead 65 82 Pure Pad 0 83 Chiff Lead 64 83 Rubby 0 84 Charang Lead 64 84 Distorted Lead 65 84 Wire Lead Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 0 85 Voice Lead 24 85 Synth Aahs 64 85 Vox Lead 0 86 Fifths Lead 35 86 Big Five 0 87 Bass & Lead 16 87 Big & Low 64 87 Fat & Perky 65 87 Soft Whirl SYNTH PAD 0 88 New Age Pad 64 88 Fantasy 0 89 Warm Pad 16 89 Thick Pad 17 89 Soft Pad 18 89 Sine Pad 64 89 Horn Pad 65 89 Rotary Strings 0 90 Poly Synth Pad 64 90 Poly Pad 80 65 90 Click Pad 66 90 Analog Pad 67 90 Square Pad 0 91 Choir Pad 64 91 Heaven 66 91 Itopia 67 91 CC Pad 0 92 Bowed Pad 64 92 Glacier 65 92 Glass Pad 0 93 Metallic Pad 64 93 Tine Pad 65 93 Pan Pad 0 94 Halo Pad 0 95 Sweep Pad 20 95 Shwimmer 27 95 Converge 64 95 Polar Pad 66 95 Celestial SYNTH EFFECTS 0 96 Rain 45 96 Clavi Pad 64 96 Harmo Rain 65 96 African Wind 66 96 Carib 0 97 Sound Track 27 97 Prologue 64 97 Ancestral 0 98 Crystal 12 98 Synth Drum Comp 14 98 Popcorn 18 98 Tiny Bells 35 98 Round Glockenspiel 40 98 Glockenspiel Chimes 41 98 Clear Bells 42 98 Chorus Bells 64 98 Synth Mallet 65 98 Soft Crystal 66 98 Loud Glockenspiel 67 98 Christmas Bells Bank Select Voice No. MSB 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 528 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 68 98 Vibraphone Bells 69 98 Digital Bells 70 98 Air Bells 71 98 Bell Harp 72 98 Gamelimba 0 99 Atmosphere 18 99 Warm Atmosphere 19 99 Hollow Release 40 99 Nylon Electric Piano 64 99 Nylon Harp 65 99 Harp Vox 66 99 Atmosphere Pad 67 99 Planet 0 100 Brightness 64 100 Fantasy Bells 96 100 Smokey 0 101 Goblins 64 101 Goblins Synth 65 101 Creeper 66 101 Ring Pad 67 101 Ritual 68 101 To Heaven 70 101 Night 71 101 Glisten 96 101 Bell Choir 0 102 Echoes 8 102 Echoes 2 14 102 Echo Pan 64 102 Echo Bells 65 102 Big Pan 66 102 Synth Piano 67 102 Creation 68 102 Star Dust 69 102 Resonant & Panning 0 103 Sci-Fi 64 103 Starz WORLD 0 104 Sitar 32 104 Detuned Sitar 35 104 Sitar 2 96 104 Tambra 97 104 Tamboura 0 105 Banjo 28 105 Muted Banjo 96 105 Rabab 97 105 Gopichant 98 105 Oud 0 106 Shamisen 0 107 Koto 96 107 Taisho-kin 97 107 Kanoon 0 108 Kalimba 0 109 Bagpipe 0 110 Fiddle 0 111 Shanai 64 111 Shanai 2 96 111 Pungi 97 111 Hichiriki PERCUSSIVE 0 112 Tinkle Bell 83 Voice List 84 Bank Select Voice No. MSB 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 96 112 Bonang 97 112 Altair 98 112 Gamelan Gongs 99 112 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 100 112 Rama Cymbal 101 112 Asian Bells 0 113 Agogo 0 114 Steel Drums 97 114 Glass Percussion 98 114 Thai Bells 0 115 Woodblock 96 115 Castanets 0 116 Taiko Drum 96 116 Gran Cassa 0 117 Melodic Tom 64 117 Melodic Tom 2 65 117 Real Tom 66 117 Rock Tom 0 118 Synth Drum 64 118 Analog Tom 65 118 Electronic Percussion 0 119 Reverse Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 0 120 Fret Noise 0 121 Breath Noise 0 122 Seashore 0 123 Bird Tweet 0 124 Telephone Ring 0 125 Helicopter 0 126 Applause 0 127 Gunshot 0 0 Cutting Noise 0 1 Cutting Noise 2 0 3 String Slap 0 16 Flute Key Click 0 32 Shower 0 33 Thunder 0 34 Wind 0 35 Stream 0 36 Bubble 0 37 Feed 0 48 Dog 0 49 Horse 0 50 Bird Tweet 2 0 54 Ghost 0 55 Maou 0 64 Phone Call 0 65 Door Squeak 0 66 Door Slam 0 67 Scratch Cut 0 68 Scratch Split 0 69 Wind Chime 0 70 Telephone Ring 2 0 80 Car Engine Ignition 0 81 Car Tires Squeal 0 82 Car Passing 0 83 Car Crash 0 84 Siren 0 85 Train 0 86 Jet Plane Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Change# 87 88 89 90 96 97 98 99 100 112 113 114 115 Voice Name Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework ● DJ Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 601 602 603 604 605 0 0 0 0 0 123 123 123 123 123 MIDI Program Change# DJ 118 119 120 121 122 Voice Name DJ Set 1 DJ Set 2 DJ Set 3 DJ Set 4 DJ Set 5 Voice List ● DJ Voice List Voice No. MSB/LSB/PC No. Note 036 C 1 037 C# 1 038 D 1 039 D# 1 040 E 1 041 F 1 042 F# 1 043 G 1 044 G# 1 045 A 1 046 A# 1 047 B 1 048 C 2 049 C# 2 050 D 2 051 D# 2 052 E 2 053 F 2 054 F# 2 055 G 2 056 G# 2 057 A 2 058 A# 2 059 B 2 060 C 3 061 C# 3 062 D 3 063 D# 3 064 E 3 065 F 3 066 F# 3 067 G 3 068 G# 3 069 A 3 070 A# 3 071 B 3 072 C 4 073 C# 4 074 D 4 075 D# 4 076 E 4 077 F 4 078 F# 4 079 G 4 080 G# 4 081 A 4 082 A# 4 083 B 4 084 C 5 085 C# 5 086 D 5 087 D# 5 088 E 5 089 F 5 090 F# 5 091 G 5 092 G# 5 093 A 5 094 A# 5 095 B 5 096 C 6 601 000/123/118 DJ Set 1 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 602 000/123/119 DJ Set 2 Bass Drum Soft Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 603 000/123/120 DJ Set 3 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 604 000/123/121 DJ Set 4 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 605 000/123/122 DJ Set 5 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Ohh2 FX01 ORCH signal Go FX02 Onemoretime Onemoretime Uhh-Hit Huea Joo Reverse Huihu FXTBrs Huea GetUp Ohh1 Go Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 Go Ohh2 Heau FX02 Huihu GetUp Reverse signal Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 GetUp signal Joo FXTBrs Go Huihu FX01 ComeOn Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 Huihu Joo ComeOn Onemoretime Go GetUp Huea Ohh2 Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 GetUp Reverse Joo FX01 Ohh1 Ohh2 Onemoretime ComeOn Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 85 Style List Style No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 86 Style Name 8Beat 8BeatModern 60’sGtrPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat 8Beat OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16Beat 16Beat PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BtUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight Ballad PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP 6/8SlowRock OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 Dance EuroTrance Ibiza HouseMusik SwingHouse TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage1 Garage2 TechnoParty UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop Disco 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands Style No. 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 Style Name Swing&Jazz BigBandFast BigBandMid BigBandBallad BigBandShfl JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 Five/Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6/8Soul CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6/8Blues Country Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing Country2/4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass Latin BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GypsyRumba RmbFlamenca RumbaIsland Reggae Ballroom VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstep Style No. 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 Style Name Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive Traditional USMarch 6/8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian Waltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWalzer Musette DJ DJ-HipHop DJ-DanceSwing DJ-House DJ-GarageHouse DJ-PopR&B Pianist Stride PianoSwing PianoRag Arpeggio Musical Habanera SlowRock 8BeatPianoBallad PianoMarch 6/8PianoMarch PianoWaltz PianoBeguine Music Database List M.D.B. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 M.D.B. Name POP HITS AlvFever Croco Rk DayPdise EasySday GoMyWay HowDeep! HurryLuv I’m Torn Imagine ISurvive JustCall JustWay NikitTrp ProudGtr SailngSx Sept.Pop SultanSw SweetLrd ThnkMsic TitanicH WatchGrl WhatALoo WhitePle YestDGtr SWING & JAZZ Alex Rag Blue Set DayOfW&R HighMoon MistySax MoonLit New York PanthrSw PatrolBr PatrolSx PetiteCl RedRoses SaintMch SatinWd SaxMood SF Heart ShearJz Showbiz SplnkyTb SunnySde TstHoney TwoFoot5 WhatsNew Wild Cat WondrLnd EASY LISTENING BlackFst CaliBlue CiaoCpri Close2U DAmorStr DolanesM ElCondor Entrtain Frippers LuckySax LuvStory MyPrince OSoleMio PalomaGt PuppetBr Raindrop RedMouln R’ticGtr Schiwago ShadowGt SingRain M.D.B. No. 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 M.D.B. Name SmallWld SpkSoft SpnishEy StrangeN TieRibbn TimeGoes WhteXmas WishStar WondrWld ROMANTIC BALLADS AdelineB ArgenCry BeautBdy Bl Bayou CatMemry CavaSolo E Weiss ElvGhett Feeling Fly Away Fnl Date GreenSlv GtCncert HrdToSay LonlyPan MBoxDnce Mn Rivr Norw.Flt OnMyMnd OverRbow Red Lady ReleseMe SavingLv Shore Cl SierraMd SilverMn SmokyEye SndOfSil TblWater WhisprSx ROCK & FUSION DavAgain JumpRock OyComCha PickUpPc RdRiverR SatsfyGt Sheriff SmokeWtr TwistAgn VenusPop RHYTHM & BLUES AmazingG BoogiePf Clock Rk CU later HappyDay JohnnyB MercyBrs RisingSn S Preems SuperStv Yeh Orgn HIP HOP HOUSE 2 of US B Leave Back St FunkyTwn KillSoft MiamiTrn Nine PM SharpRap SingBack StrandD M.D.B. No. 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 M.D.B. Name LATIN NIGHTS BambaBrs BambaFlt BeHappy! CopaLola DayNight Ipanema MarinaAc MuchoTrb SmoothLt SunOfLif Sunshine Tico Org TrbWave COUNTRY & WESTERN BlownWnd Bonanza BoxerGtr CntryRds GreenGrs Jambala LondonSt LooseEL TopWorld YlwRose DISCO & PARTY AlhHwaii Babylon Barbados BirdySyn FestaMex HandsPty LuvTheme ModrnTlk NxtAlice PalomaFl PubPiano Tijuana Why MCA? BALLROOM BrazilBr CherryBr CherryOr DanubeWv MantoStr SandmnFx SundyNvr TangoPiz Tea4Two TulipWtz YesSirQk TRADITIONAL AlpenTri Balalaik Ceilidh CielPari Cl Polka Comrades Funiculi HappyPlk Herzlin HornPipe JinglBel Kufstein MexiHat MickyFlt NavyAway RlBarrel SnowWtz StarMrch WashPost WdCuttrs XmasWalz 87 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB/LSB/PC MIDI Key Alternate Keyboard Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 A#5 C6 88 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 109 127/000/000 110 127/000/001 111 127/000/008 112 127/000/016 113 127/000/024 114 127/000/025 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Snare H Soft 2 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 SD Rock H Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB/LSB/PC MIDI Key Alternate Keyboard Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off 109 127/000/000 Standard Kit 1 115 127/000/027 Dance Kit 116 127/000/032 Jazz Kit 117 127/000/040 Brush Kit 118 127/000/048 Symphony Kit 119 126/000/000 SFX Kit 1 120 126/000/001 SFX Kit 2 assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L Bass Drum L BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Marching Sn H Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Jazz Tom 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cym. H Train Jet Plane Hand Cym.Short H Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat FootSteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Ghost Maou 89 MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA [ Portable Keyboard ] Model PSR-292 MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Date:25-Jan-2002 Version : 1.0 Recognized Remarks Function... Basic Channel Default Changed 1 - 16 x 1 - 16 x Mode Default Messages Altered 3 x ************** 3 x x Note Number 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 0 - 127 0 - 127 Velocity Note ON Note OFF o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=0 o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=0 or 8nH After Touch Key's Ch's x x x x x o Pitch Bend Control Change Prog Change 0,32 1 6 38 7 10 11 64 71 72 73 74 84 91,93,94 96,97 100,101 : True # System Exclusive : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune o x x x o o x o x x x x x o x x *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 - 127 ************** o 0 - 127 o o *3 x x x x x x System : Clock Real Time: Commands o o o o Aux o x x x o x Common :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset 90 *1 Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *4 Bank Select Modulation wheel Data Entry(MSB) Data Entry(LSB) Part Volume Pan Expression Sustain Harmonic Content Release Time Attack Time Brightness Portamento Cntrl Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB *3 *4 o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) *5 o(123-125) o x Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart NOTE: *1 By default (factory settings) the PSR-292 ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type, Chorus Type, and DSP Type. *2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the PSR-292 itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. *3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Tuning. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.” <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details. <DSP Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : DSP Type MSB • ll : DSP Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details. <DRY Level> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 08H, 0mH, 11H, llH, F7H • ll : Dry Level • 0m : Channel Number <XG Parametter Change> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, hh, mm, ll, dd, F7H • hh mm ll : address • dd : data <XG Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 0nH, 4CH, aa, bb, hh, mm, ll, dd, cc, F7H • 0n : Device Number n=0 (send), 0 - f (receive) • aa bb : Byte Count (aa << 7) + bb • hh mm ll : address • dd : data <Sequence Recording Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 0AH, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H • mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH • 06H : Bulk ID • 0AH : Bulk No. • aa : Byte Count MSB • bb : Byte Count LSB • cc : amount of valid MSB data • dd : amount of valid LSB data • hh mm ll : address • bulk data : Sequence data (1byte, 2byte...7byte, MSB data) • sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data) <One Touch Setting Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 09H, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H • mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH • 06H : Bulk ID • 09H : Bulk No. • aa : Byte Count MSB • bb : Byte Count LSB • cc : amount of valid MSB data • dd : amount of valid LSB data • hh mm ll : address • bulk data : Sequence data (low 4bit, high 4 bit...low 4bit, high 4 bit) • sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data) *4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted.When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. *5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. 91 Effect map MIDI Implementation Chart ■ Effect map * If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.. * By using an external sequencer, which is capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, you can select the Reverb, Chorus and DSP effect types which are not accessible from the PSR-292 panel itself. When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer, “ - ” will be shown on the display. ● REVERB TYPE MSB 00 000 No Effect 001 (1)Hall1 002 Room 003 Stage 004 Plate 005...127 No Effect 01 02 08 TYPE LSB 16 (5)Stage1 (7)Plate1 17 18 (2)Hall2 (3)Room1 (6)Stage2 (8)Plate2 19 20 (4)Room2 ● CHORUS TYPE MSB 00 000...064 No Effect 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 068...127 No Effect 01 02 08 TYPE LSB 16 17 18 19 20 18 19 20 Chorus2 Flanger1 Chorus1 Flanger2 ● DSP TYPE LSB 00 01 02 08 16 000 No Effect 001 (1)Hall1 002 Room 003 Stage (5)Stage1 004 Plate (7)Plate1 005 Delay L,C,R (26)Delay L,C,R 006 (27)Delay L,R 007 (28)Echo 008 (29)Cross Delay (9)Early Reflection1 (10)Early Reflection2 009 010 (11)Gate Reverb 011 (12)Reverse Gate 012...019 No Effect 020 (30)Karaoke 021...064 No Effect 065 Chorus (14)Chorus2 066 Celeste (15)Flanger1 067 Flanger 068 Symphonic (17)Symphonic (19)Rotary Speaker1 069 Rotary Speaker 070 Tremolo (21)Tremolo1 071 Auto Pan (24)Auto Pan 072 (18)Phaser 073 Distortion 074 (33)Overdrive (34)Amp Simulation (31)Distortion Hard 075 076 (36)3Band EQ 077 (37)2Band EQ 078 Auto Wah (25)Auto Wah 079...127 No Effect TYPE MSB 92 17 (2)Hall2 (3)Room1 (6)Stage2 (8)Plate2 (4)Room2 (13)Chorus1 (16)Flanger2 (20)Rotary Speaker2 (22)Tremolo2 (23)Guitar Tremolo (32)Distortion Soft (35)EQ Telephone Specifications Keyboards • 61 standard-size keys (C1 - C6), with Touch Response. Display • Large multi-function LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME : MIN - MAX Panel Controls • SONG, VOICE, STYLE, M.D.B., DICTIONARY, DJ, PC, LESSON L, R, METRONOME, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION(TRANSPOSE), TOUCH, HARMONY, DUAL, SPLIT, TEMPO/TAP, ONE TOUCH SETTING, [0][9], [+](YES), [-](NO), CATEGORY, SELECT, Dial Voice • 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 480 XG voices + 5 DJ voices • Polyphony : 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • 135 styles • Style Control : ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO ENDING, MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering : Multi fingering • Style Volume Music Database • 208 Yamaha Educational Suite • Dictionary • Lesson 1-4 One Touch Setting • Preset A and B (for each style) • Memory Function • Transpose, Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Main Voice – Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Dual Voice – Voice; Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Split Voice – Voice; Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, DSP Type, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, Local On/Off, External Clock, Bulk Data Send, Initial Setup Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Time Signature, Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade On/Off, Demo and DJ Cancel MIDI • Local On/Off • Initial Setup Send • External Clock • Bulk Data Send • Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 3.0W + 3.0W Speakers • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption (when using PA-3C power adaptor) • UL/CSA :14W • CE :15W Power Supply • Adaptor : Yamaha PA-3C AC power adaptor • Batteries : Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 952 x 389 x 140 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/3" x 5-1/2") Weight • 6.8 kg (15 lbs.) Supplied Accessories • Music Stand • Owner’s Manual • Song Book Optional Accessories • • • • Headphones : HPE-150 AC power adaptor : PA-3B/3C Footswitch : FC4, FC5 Keyboard stand : L-2C * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Effects • • • • Reverb : 8 types Chorus : 4 types DSP : 38 types Harmony : 26 types Song • 100 Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume Recording • Song User Song : 5 Songs Recording Tracks : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE 93 Index Panel controls and terminals +/- ............................................... 9, 24 A-B REPEAT.............................. 9, 53 ACMP ......................................... 9, 36 CATEGORY ............................... 8, 23 DC IN 12V ................................. 9, 10 DEMO ........................................ 8, 14 Dial ............................................. 8, 24 DICTIONARY............................ 8, 45 DJ................................................ 8, 22 DUAL ......................................... 8, 26 FF................................................ 9, 53 FUNCTION................................ 8, 74 HARMONY ............................... 8, 31 INTRO ENDING........................ 9, 36 LEFT................................................53 LESSON ..................................... 8, 62 M.D.B. ........................................ 8, 48 MAIN/AUTO FILL .................... 9, 36 MASTER VOLUME .........................8 MEMORY .................................. 9, 29 METRONOME .......................... 8, 20 MIDI IN...................................... 9, 67 MIDI OUT.................................. 9, 67 NO ........................................ 9, 59, 60 Numeric keypad.......................... 9, 24 ONE TOUCH SETTING............ 9, 28 PAUSE ........................................ 9, 53 PC ............................................... 8, 73 PHONES/OUTPUT.................... 9, 11 PORTABLE GRAND................. 8, 20 REC .................................................57 RECORD...........................................9 REW ........................................... 9, 53 RIGHT.............................................53 SELECT ..................................... 8, 24 SONG .............................8, 51, 57, 61 SONG MEMORY ...................... 9, 57 SPLIT ......................................... 8, 27 STANDBY/ON........................... 8, 11 START/STOP ....................... 9, 36, 53 STYLE........................................ 8, 35 SUSTAIN.................................... 9, 11 SYNC START ............................ 9, 36 SYNC STOP............................... 9, 36 TEMPO/TAP ........................ 9, 20, 41 TOUCH ...................................... 8, 30 VOICE ........................................ 8, 23 YES....................................... 9, 59, 60 Misc. I #000 OTS ........................................ 26 Indicator .......................................... 18 Initial Setup Send ............................ 69 Initialization .................................... 78 Internal Clock.................................. 69 Intro ................................................. 38 A A-B repreat ..................................... 54 AC Power adaptor ........................... 10 accessory jacks................................ 11 accompaniment sections ................. 42 Accompaniment Split Point ............ 27 Batteries .......................................... 10 Beat display..................................... 51 beat marks ....................................... 51 Bulk................................................. 69 Left .................................................. 62 Lesson ............................................. 61 Lesson Track ................................... 63 Level, chorus send........................... 32 Level, DSP send .............................. 32 Level, reverb send ........................... 31 Local on/off ..................................... 69 C M B Chord Names .................................. 47 Chord Track .................................... 57 Chord Type...................................... 47 Chords, About ................................. 46 Chords, Fingered............................. 43 Chords, Single Finger ..................... 43 Chorus............................................. 32 Clearing, Song ................................ 59 D DEMO Cancel................................. 14 Demo song ...................................... 14 Dictionary ....................................... 45 DJ .................................................... 22 Drum Kit Voice Chart ..................... 88 DSP ................................................. 32 Dual Voice....................................... 26 E Effects ............................................. 31 Ending............................................. 36 External Clock ................................ 69 F Fill-in .............................................. 42 Fingered chords............................... 43 Flash memory ........................... 71, 78 Footswitch....................................... 11 Function .......................................... 74 M.D.B. (music database)................. 48 Main A/B......................................... 42 Main Voice....................................... 25 Master Volume................................... 8 Melody Voice Change ..................... 55 Metronome ...................................... 20 MIDI................................................ 66 MIDI channels................................. 67 MIDI Implementation Chart ........... 90 MIDI LSB Receive cancel .............. 70 MIDI terminals................................ 67 Multi Fingering ............................... 43 Music Stand..................................... 19 O Octave.............................................. 19 Octave, dual..................................... 26 Octave, main.................................... 25 Octave, split..................................... 27 One Touch Setting ........................... 28 P Pan, dual .......................................... 26 Pan, main......................................... 25 Pan, split .......................................... 27 PC.................................................... 73 Portable Grand ................................ 20 Q G Quick Guide .................................... 12 GM System Level 1 ........................ 66 Grade............................................... 65 R H Harmony ......................................... 31 Headphones..................................... 11 94 L recording, song ................................ 56 Reverb ............................................. 31 Right................................................ 62 Root ................................................. 46 Index S T V sections (accompaniment) ...............42 Single Finger chords........................43 Song Clear .......................................59 Song Filer ........................................72 Song Volume....................................55 songs, playing ..................................53 songs, recording...............................56 songs, selecting................................51 Specifications...................................93 Split Point ........................................27 Split Voice........................................27 Style Volume....................................42 styles, playing ..................................36 styles, selecting................................35 Sync Start.........................................37 Sync Stop.........................................40 Tap................................................... 37 Tempo ....................................... 20, 41 Time Signature................................ 21 Touch Sensitivity............................. 30 track (song) ..................................... 57 tracks, muting.................................. 58 Transpose ........................................ 29 Troubleshooting .............................. 77 Tuning ............................................. 29 Voice List......................................... 79 voices, Drum Kit ............................. 88 voices, selecting and playing........... 23 voices, XG....................................... 80 Volume, dual.................................... 26 Volume, harmony ............................ 31 Volume, main .................................. 25 Volume, Metronome........................ 21 Volume, Song .................................. 55 Volume, split.................................... 27 Volume, Style .................................. 42 U User songs....................................... 56 X XG voices........................................ 80 95 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ (Retailer) Date______________________________________ YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-3085-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 ASIA BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. No.11 Ubi Road 1, No.06-02, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 OCEANIA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 32 Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2002 Yamaha Corporation V874220 ???PO???.?-01C0 Printed in China
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98

Yamaha PSR-292 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Pianos digitales
Tipo
Manual de usuario
Este manual también es adecuado para